ZyXEL Communications P8802T Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD With USB User Manual Book

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD With USB Book

User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1781920
Application ID	VsyJPwwfMMeGBIJWfXYh2Q==
Document Description	User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	387.74kB (4846723 bits)
Date Submitted	2012-09-03 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-09-03 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-10-30 08:50:43
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-10-30 08:50:43
Document Title	Book.book
Document Creator	FrameMaker 9.0
Document Author:	MT01165

Basic Home Station VDSL2
P8802T
Wireless N VDSL2 GW with USB
Default Login Details
LAN I P Address
ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1: 8000
Trust ed I P
Address for t he
Device Access
192.168.1.252
User Nam e
Adm inist rat or
Password
Te1ef6n1c4
www.zyxel.com
Version 1.00
Edit ion 1, 7/ 2012
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2012
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Not e: This guide is a reference for a ser ies of product s. Ther efore som e feat ures or
opt ions in t his guide m ay not be available in your product .
Graphics in t his book m ay differ slight ly from t he product due t o differences in operat ing syst em s,
operat ing syst em versions, or if you inst alled updat ed soft ware for your device. Every effort has
been m ade t o ensure t hat t he inform at ion in t his m anual is accurat e.
Related Documentation
• Quick St art Guide
The Quick St art Guide helps you get up and running right away. I t cont ains inform at ion on set t ing
up your net work and configuring for I nt ernet access.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 11
Chapter 1
Introducing the VDSL Router ............................................................................................................13
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................13
1.2 How to Manage the VDSL Router .....................................................................................................13
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the VDSL Router ....................................................................................13
1.4 Power On/Off the VDSL Router ........................................................................................................14
1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................14
1.6 3G WAN ............................................................................................................................................16
1.7 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................16
1.8 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................17
1.8.1 Using the Wifi Button ...............................................................................................................17
Chapter 2
User Setup Guide................................................................................................................................19
2.1 Access the VDSL Router Configuration ............................................................................................19
2.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................20
2.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................20
2.2.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................22
2.2.3 Without WPS ...........................................................................................................................26
2.3 Using Wireless MAC Authentication to Block a Computer’s Access to the Wireless Network ..........28
2.4 Setting Up a NAT Virtual Server for a Game Server .........................................................................29
2.5 Access Your Home Computer from the Internet Using DDNS ..........................................................30
2.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ..................................................................31
2.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your VDSL Router ................................................................................31
2.5.3 Configuring Port Forwarding on your VDSL Router ................................................................32
2.5.4 Testing the DDNS Setting ........................................................................................................33
2.6 Configuring the Firewall ....................................................................................................................34
2.6.1 Interface Default Policy ............................................................................................................34
2.6.2 Firewall Rules ..........................................................................................................................34
2.7 LAN DHCP for IP Addressing Assignment ........................................................................................36
2.7.1 Configuring Static DHCP .........................................................................................................37
2.8 Checking the Software Version .........................................................................................................38
2.9 Restoring to Factory Default .............................................................................................................39
2.10 How to Use File Sharing on the VDSL Router ................................................................................40
2.10.1 Set Up File Sharing ...............................................................................................................40
2.10.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer ........................................................................42
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
2.11 Using the Media Server Feature ....................................................................................................43
2.11.1 Configuring the VDSL Router ................................................................................................43
2.11.2 Using Windows Media Player ................................................................................................43
2.11.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter ...............................................................................................46
2.12 How to Share a USB Printer via Your VDSL Router .......................................................................47
2.12.1 Add a New Printer Using Windows ........................................................................................48
2.12.2 Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X ............................................................................52
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 59
Chapter 3
Device Info Screens............................................................................................................................61
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................61
3.2 The Device Info Summary Screen ....................................................................................................61
3.3 The WAN Info Screen .......................................................................................................................63
3.4 The 3G Status Screen .......................................................................................................................64
3.5 The LAN Statistics Screen ................................................................................................................65
3.6 The WAN Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................66
3.7 The xTM Statistics Screen ................................................................................................................67
3.8 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................68
3.8.1 The ADSL BER Test Screen ....................................................................................................71
3.9 The Route Info Screen ......................................................................................................................71
3.10 The ARP Info Screen ......................................................................................................................72
3.11 The DHCP Leases Screen ..............................................................................................................73
Chapter 4
WAN .....................................................................................................................................................75
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................75
4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................75
4.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................76
4.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................78
4.2 The Layer-2 Interface ATM Screen ...................................................................................................78
4.2.1 Layer-2 ATM Interface Configuration .......................................................................................79
4.3 The Layer-2 Interface PTM Screen ...................................................................................................81
4.3.1 Layer-2 PTM Interface Configuration ......................................................................................82
4.4 The WAN Service Screen .................................................................................................................83
4.4.1 WAN Connection Configuration ...............................................................................................85
4.5 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................97
4.6 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................99
Chapter 5
LAN Setup .........................................................................................................................................105
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
5.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................105
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................105
5.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................106
5.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................106
5.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................106
5.2.1 Add DHCP Static IP Lease Screen ........................................................................................108
5.3 The IPv6 LAN Auto Configuration Screen .......................................................................................109
5.4 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................ 111
5.4.1 LANs, WANs and the VDSL Router ....................................................................................... 112
5.4.2 DHCP Setup .......................................................................................................................... 112
5.4.3 DNS Server Addresses ......................................................................................................... 112
5.4.4 LAN TCP/IP ........................................................................................................................... 113
Chapter 6
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................ 115
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 115
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter .......................................................................................... 115
6.2 What You Need to Know ................................................................................................................. 115
6.3 The Virtual Servers Screen ............................................................................................................. 115
6.3.1 The Virtual Servers Add Screen ........................................................................................... 116
6.4 The DMZ Host Screen .................................................................................................................... 118
6.5 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................ 119
Chapter 7
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................121
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................121
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................121
7.2 The Firewall General Screen .........................................................................................................121
7.2.1 Default Policy Configuration ..................................................................................................122
7.3 The Firewall Rules Screen ..............................................................................................................123
7.3.1 Firewall Rules Configuration ................................................................................................125
Chapter 8
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................127
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................127
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................127
8.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................................127
8.3 The QoS Screen ............................................................................................................................129
8.4 The QoS Queue Setup Screen .......................................................................................................129
8.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...........................................................................................................131
8.5 The QoS Classification Setup Screen .............................................................................................132
8.5.1 Add QoS Classification Rule ................................................................................................133
8.6 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................136
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 9
Routing ..............................................................................................................................................139
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................139
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................139
9.2 The Default Gateway Screen ..........................................................................................................140
9.3 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................................140
9.3.1 Add Static Route ....................................................................................................................141
9.4 The Policy Routing Screen ..............................................................................................................142
9.4.1 Add Policy Routing ................................................................................................................142
9.5 The RIP Screen ...............................................................................................................................143
Chapter 10
DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................................145
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................145
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................145
10.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................146
10.2 The DNS Server Screen ...............................................................................................................146
10.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................147
10.3.1 The Dynamic DNS Add Screen ...........................................................................................148
Chapter 11
UPnP ..................................................................................................................................................151
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................151
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................151
11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................151
11.2 The UPnP Screen .........................................................................................................................152
11.3 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Example ......................................................................................152
11.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ...........................................................................................154
Chapter 12
USB Services ....................................................................................................................................161
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................161
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................161
12.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................161
12.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................162
12.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................163
12.2.2 Add New File Sharing User .................................................................................................164
12.3 The Printer Server Screen ............................................................................................................165
12.3.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................165
12.4 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................166
Chapter 13
Certificates ........................................................................................................................................169
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................169
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................169
13.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................169
13.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................169
13.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................170
13.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................172
13.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................173
13.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................174
13.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................175
Chapter 14
Wireless .............................................................................................................................................177
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................177
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................177
14.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................178
14.2 The Basic Screen .........................................................................................................................178
14.3 Wireless Security ..........................................................................................................................179
14.4 MAC Filter .....................................................................................................................................183
14.4.1 The MAC Filter Add Screen
............................................................................................184
14.5 The Advanced Screen ...................................................................................................................184
14.6 Wireless Station Info .....................................................................................................................186
14.7 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................186
14.7.1 Wireless Network Overview .................................................................................................186
14.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................................188
14.7.3 Wireless Security Overview .................................................................................................188
14.7.4 Signal Problems ..................................................................................................................191
14.7.5 BSS .....................................................................................................................................191
14.7.6 Preamble Type ....................................................................................................................192
14.7.7 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ...............................................................................................192
14.7.8 Vista as a WPS External Registrar ......................................................................................198
Chapter 15
Voice ..................................................................................................................................................201
15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................201
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................201
15.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP ...................................................................................202
15.2 Before You Begin ..........................................................................................................................203
15.3 The SIP Settings Screen ..............................................................................................................203
15.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen ................................................................................................209
15.4.1 Dial Plan Rules ....................................................................................................................215
15.5 The Phone Region Screen ...........................................................................................................216
15.6 The Call Rule Screen ....................................................................................................................217
15.7 Call History Summary Screen .......................................................................................................219
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
15.8 Outgoing Calls Screen ..................................................................................................................219
15.9 Incoming Calls Screen ..................................................................................................................220
15.10 Technical Reference ....................................................................................................................221
15.10.1 Quality of Service (QoS) ....................................................................................................230
15.10.2 Phone Services Overview .................................................................................................231
Chapter 16
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................237
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................237
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................237
16.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................237
16.3 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................238
16.4 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management ......................................................................................238
Chapter 17
Settings..............................................................................................................................................241
17.1 Backup Configuration Using the Web Configurator ......................................................................241
17.2 Restore Configuration Using the Web Configurator ......................................................................241
17.3 Restoring Factory Defaults ............................................................................................................242
Chapter 18
Log ....................................................................................................................................................245
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................245
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................245
18.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................245
18.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................246
18.3 The System Log Configuration Screen .........................................................................................246
Chapter 19
TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................249
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................249
19.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................249
Chapter 20
Internet Time .....................................................................................................................................253
20.1 The Internet Time Screen ...........................................................................................................253
Chapter 21
Access Control .................................................................................................................................255
21.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................255
21.2 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................255
Chapter 22
Software Upgrade .............................................................................................................................257
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................257
22.2 The Update Software Screen ........................................................................................................257
Chapter 23
Reboot ...............................................................................................................................................259
23.1 Restart Using the Web Configurator .............................................................................................259
Chapter 24
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................261
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................261
24.2 VDSL Router Access and Login ....................................................................................................262
24.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................264
24.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................265
24.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................266
24.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................266
Appendix A Legal Information..........................................................................................................269
Index ..................................................................................................................................................273
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Table of Contents
10
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
11
12
C HAPT ER
Introducing the VDSL Router
1.1 Overview
The P8802T is a VDSL2 rout er and 100/ 10 Mb Et hernet gat eway wit h a four- port built- in Et hernet
swit ch and I EEE 802.11n wireless. The VDSL Rout er allows wired and wireless client s t o safely
access t he I nt ernet . The built- in firewall blocks unaut horized access t o your net work.
Only use firmware for your VDSL Router’s specific model. Refer to the
label on the bottom of your VDSL Router.
The VDSL Rout er has a USB port for sharing files via a USB st orage device, sharing a USB print er, or
a 3G dongle for a backup connect ion.
1.2 How to Manage the VDSL Router
Use t he Web Configurat or t o m anage t he VDSL Rout er using a ( support ed) web browser.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the VDSL Router
Do t he following t hings regularly t o m ake t he VDSL Rout er m ore secure and t o m anage t he VDSL
Rout er m ore effect ively.
• Change t he password. Use a password t hat ’s not easy t o guess and t hat consist s of different
t ypes of charact ers, such as num bers and let t ers.
• Writ e down t he password and put it in a safe place.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
13
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL Router
1.4 Power On/Off the VDSL Router
Use t he Pow e r On / Off but t on at t he left side of
t he device when you face t o t he front panel t o t urn
t he VDSL Rout er on or off.
1.5 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays t he labels of t he LEDs.
Figure 1 LEDs on t he Device
3G
None of t he LEDs are on if t he VDSL Rout er is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descript ions
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Power
Green
On
The VDSL Rout er is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is self- t est ing.
On
The VDSL Rout er det ect ed an error while self- t est ing, or t here is a
device m alfunct ion.
Off
The VDSL Rout er is not receiving power.
Blinking
Firm ware upgrade is in progress.
Red
14
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL Router
Table 1 LED Descript ions ( cont inued)
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Phone
1/ 2
Green
On
A SI P account is regist ered for t he phone port .
Blinking
A t elephone connect ed t o t he phone port has it s receiver off of
t he hook or t here is an incom ing call.
On
A SI P account is regist ered for t he phone port and t here is a
voice m essage in t he corresponding SI P account .
Blinking
A t elephone connect ed t o t he phone port has it s receiver off of
t he hook and t here is a voice m essage in t he corresponding SI P
account .
Off
The phone port does not have a SI P account regist ered.
On
The VDSL Rout er has a successful 100 Mbps Et hernet connect ion wit h a
device on t he Local Area Net work ( LAN) .
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is sending or receiving dat a t o/ from t he LAN at 100
Mbps.
Off
The VDSL Rout er does not have an Et hernet connect ion wit h t he LAN.
On
The DSL line is up.
Orange
Et hernet
1- 4
DSL
I nt ernet
Green
Green
Green
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is init ializing t he DSL line.
Off
The DSL line is down.
On
The VDSL Rout er has an I P connect ion but no t raffic.
Your device has a WAN I P address ( eit her st at ic or assigned by a DHCP
server) , PPP negot iat ion was successfully com plet ed ( if used) and t he
DSL connect ion is up.
3G
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is sending or receiving I P t raffic.
Off
There is no I nt ernet connect ion or t he gat eway is in bridged m ode.
Red
On
The VDSL Rout er at t em pt ed t o m ake an I P connect ion but failed.
Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE
response, PPPoE aut hent icat ion failed.
Green
On
The 3G backup connect ion t hrough a 3G USB dongle is connect ed.
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is negot iat ing a backup connect ion t hrough a 3G
dongle or sending or receiving t raffic t hrough t he backup connect ion.
Fast Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is sending or receiving t raffic t hrough t he backup
connect ion.
On
Aut hent icat ion of t he 3G backup connect ion t hrough a 3G USB dongle
failed.
Off
The VDSL Rout er is using t he broadband int erface.
On
The wireless net work is act ivat ed.
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is com m unicat ing wit h ot her wireless client s.
Blinking
The VDSL Rout er is set t ing up a WPS connect ion.
Off
The wireless net work is not act ivat ed.
Red
Wifi
Green
Orange
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
15
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL Router
1.6 3G WAN
The USB port ( at t he right side of t he device when you
face t o t he front panel) allows you t o wirelessly
connect t o a 3G net owk t o get I nt ernet access by
at t aching a 3G dongle. You m ust leave t he VDSL
Rout er DSL or Et hernet WAN port unconnect ed and
at t ached a 3G dongle t o use 3G as your WAN. You can
also heve t he VDSL Rout er use t he 3G WAN
connect ion as a backup. That m eans t he VDSL Rout er
swit ches t o t he 3G wireless WAN connect ion aft er t he
wired DSL or Et hernet WAN connect ion fails. The
VDSL Rout er aut om at ically changes back t o use t he
wired DSL or Et hernet WAN connect ion w hen it is
available.
Figure 2 Internet Access Application: 3G WAN
1.7 The RESET Button
I f you forget your password or cannot access t he web configurat or, you will need t o use t he RESET
but t on at t he back of t he device t o reload t he fact ory- default configurat ion file. This delet es all your
and t he password will be reset t o “ 1234”.
Make sure t he Pow e r LED is green and on ( not blinking and not red or flashing red) .
To set t he device back t o t he fact ory default set t ings, press t he RESET but t on for t en seconds or
unt il t he Pow e r LED begins t o blink and t hen release it . When t he Pow e r LED begins t o blink, t he
default s have been rest ored and t he device rest art s.
Not e: The default usernam e and password are on t he label on t he bot t om of t he Device.
16
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL Router
1.8 Wireless Access
The VDSL Rout er is a wireless Access Point ( AP) for wireless client s, such as not ebook com put ers,
sm art phones, or t ablet s. I t allows t hem t o connect t o t he I nt ernet wit hout having t o rely on
inconvenient Et hernet cables.
You can connect t o your wireless net work using t he W ifi but t on, wit hout having t o access t he Web
Configurat or.
Figure 3 Wireless Access Exam ple
1.8.1 Using the Wifi Button
Not e: The wireless client m ust be a WPS- aware device ( for exam ple, a WPS USB adapt er or
PCMCI A card) , which can be ident ified by t he WPS logo :
I f t he wireless net work is t urned off, press t he W ifi but t on at t he back of t he VDSL Rout er for one
second. Once t he W ifi LED t urns green, t he wireless net work is act ive.
You can also use t he W ifi but t on t o quickly set up a secure wireless connect ion bet ween t he VDSL
Rout er and a WPS- com pat ible client by adding one device at a t im e.
To act ivat e WPS:
Make sure t he Pow e r LED is green and not blinking.
Press t he W ifi but t on for t en seconds and release it .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
17
Chapter 1 Introducing the VDSL Router
Enable WPS on anot her WPS- enabled client device wit hin range of t he VDSL Rout er. I f you do not
know how t o enable WPS on t hat client device, refer t o it s m anual. The W ifi LED flashes green and
orange while t he VDSL Rout er set s up a WPS connect ion wit h t he ot her WPS enabled client device.
Once t he connect ion is successfully m ade, t he W ifi LED shines green.
To t urn off t he wireless net work, press t he W ifi but t on on t he front of t he VDSL Rout er for one t o
five seconds. The W ifi LED t urns off when t he wireless net work is off.
18
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
User Setup Guide
This chapt er cont ains inst ruct ions t o quickly set up feat ures on t he syst em .
• Access t he VDSL Rout er Configurat ion ( Sect ion 2.1 on page 19)
• Changing t he Configurat ion Password ( Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)
• Set t ing Up a 3G Backup I nt ernet Connect ion ( Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)
• Set t ing your DSL Account ’s Usernam e and Password ( Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)
• Set t up Up a Secure Wireless Net work ( Sect ion 2.2 on page 20)
• Using Wireless MAC Aut hent icat ion t o Block a Com put er ’s Access t o t he Wireless Net work
( Sect ion 2.3 on page 28)
• Set t ing Up an NAT Virt ual Server for a Gam e Server (Sect ion 2.4 on page 29)
• Access Your Hom e Com put er from t he I nt ernet Using DDNS ( Sect ion 2.5 on page 30)
• Configuring t he Firewall ( Sect ion 2.6 on page 34)
• LAN DHCP for I P Addressing Assignm ent ( Sect ion 2.7 on page 36)
• Checking t he Soft ware Version ( Sect ion 2.8 on page 38)
• Rest oring t o Fact ory Default ( Sect ion 2.9 on page 39)
• How t o Use File Sharing on t he VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 2.10 on page 40)
• Using t he Media Server Feat ure ( Sect ion 2.11 on page 43)
• How t o Share a USB Print er via Your VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 2.12 on page 47)
2.1 Access the VDSL Router Configuration
Connect t o t he Web Configurat or t o configure t he VDSL Rout er. Ent er t he LAN I P address of t he
VDSL Rout er in your web browser ( see t he cover page of t his guide for t he default login
inform at ion) .
The D e vice I nfo Sum m a r y screen displays. See Sect ion 3.2 on page 61 for m ore inform at ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
19
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.2 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thom as set s up a wireless net work t o give his not ebook wireless I nt ernet access. The VDSL Rout er
serves as an access point ( AP) t o let t he not ebook connect t o t he I nt ernet .
Thom as configures t he wireless net work set t ings on t he VDSL Rout er and uses WPS ( Sect ion 2.2.2
on page 22) or m anual configurat ion ( Sect ion 2.2.3 on page 26) t o connect his not ebook.
2.2.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This exam ple uses t he following param et ers t o set up a wireless net work.
SSI D
Exam ple
Se cu r it y Le ve l
WPA2- PSK
W PA/ W API pa ssph r a se
DoNot St ealMyWirelessNet work
8 0 2 .1 1 M ode
802.11b/ g/ n Mixed
Not e: See t he st icker on t he bot t om of t he VDSL Rout er for t he default wireless LAN
SSI D, securit y m ode, and password.
20
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Click W ir e le ss t o display t he wireless set t ings. Make sure Ena ble W ir e le ss is select ed. Type
Ex a m ple in t he SSI D field.
Click W ir e le ss > Se cur it y, m ake sure En a ble d W PS is set t o Ena ble d. Select W PA2 - PSK in t he
N e t w or k Au t h e n t ica t ion field. Ent er t he W PA/ W API pa ssph r a se . Click Apply/ Sa ve .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
21
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Use WPS t o wirelessly connect t he not ebook t o t he VDSL Rout er ( see Sect ion 2.2.2 on page 22) or
use t he not ebook’s wireless client t o search for t he VDSL Rout er ( see Sect ion 2.2.3 on page 26) .
2.2.2 Using WPS
This exam ple uses WPS t o connect a ZyXEL NWD210N wireless client t o t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless
net work.
Not e: One way t o see if t he wireless client ( a not ebook, sm art phone, t ablet , wireless USB adapt er,
or wireless PCMCI A card for exam ple) support s WPS is t o look for t he WPS logo :
22
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
I t covers t wo WPS m et hods t o set up t he wireless client set t ings:
• Push Bu t t on Configu r a t ion ( PBC) - sim ply press a but t on. This is t he easier m et hod.
• PI N Con figu r a t ion - ent er a wireless client ’s Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber ( PI N) in t he VDSL
Rout er.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
Make sure t hat your VDSL Rout er is on and your not ebook is wit hin range of t he wireless signal.
Make sure t hat you have inst alled t he wireless client driver and ut ilit y in your not ebook.
I n t he wireless client ut ilit y, go t o t he WPS set t ing page. Enable WPS and press t he W ifi but t on
( St a r t or W ifi but t on) .
Push and hold t he W ifi but t on locat ed on t he VDSL Rout er’s rear panel for 10 seconds.
Not e: I t doesn’t m at t er which device’s but t on you press first . You m ust press t he second
but t on wit hin t wo m inut es of pressing t he first one.
Not e: The WPS but t on in t he Web Configurat or screens also has t he sam e funct ion as t he
one on t he VDSL Rout er rear panel: use eit her.
The VDSL Rout er sends t he wireless net work set t ings t o t he wireless client . This m ay t ake up t o t wo
m inut es. Aft erwards t he wireless client can com m unicat e wit h t he VDSL Rout er securely.
The following figure shows an exam ple of how t o set up a wireless net work and it s securit y by
pressing a but t on on bot h VDSL Rout er and wireless client .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
23
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
Wireless Client
VDSL Router
W ifi
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Pr e ss a n d h old for
1 0 se con ds
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
PIN Configuration
When you use t he PI N configurat ion m et hod, you need t o use bot h t he VDSL Rout er’s web
configurat or and t he wireless client ’s ut ilit y.
24
Launch your wireless client ’s configurat ion ut ilit y. Go t o t he WPS set t ings and select t he PI N m et hod
t o get a PI N num ber.
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click W ir e le ss > Se cu r it y. Enable t he WPS
funct ion and select Ent e r STA PI N . Ent er t he PI N num ber of t he wireless client and click t he Add
Enr olle e but t on. Click Apply/ Sa ve .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Act ivat e WPS on t he wireless client ut ilit y screen wit hin t wo m inut es.
The VDSL Rout er aut hent icat es t he wireless client and sends it t he proper configurat ion set t ings.
This m ay t ake up t o t wo m inut es. The wireless client can t hen com m unicat e wit h t he VDSL Rout er
securely.
The following figure shows how t o set up a wireless net work and it s securit y on a VDSL Rout er and
a wireless client by using PI N m et hod.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
25
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client
VDSL Router
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
2.2.3 Without WPS
This exam ple uses Windows XP t o connect wirelessly t o your VDSL Rout er.
26
Right- click t he wireless adapt er icon at t he bot t om right of your com put er m onit or. Click Vie w
Ava ila ble W ir e le ss N e t w or k s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Select t he VDSL Rout er’s SSI D nam e ( “ SecureWirelessNet work” in t his exam ple) and click
Conne ct ( A) .
Ent er t he password when prom pt ed and click Conn e ct .
You m ay have t o wait several m inut es while your com put er connect s t o t he wireless net work.
Congrat ulat ions! Browse t o your favorit e websit es. I f you cannot , check t hat you connect ed t o t he
correct AP, and t he signal st rengt h is OK. Click your wireless adapt er ’s icon and click Enable. Som e
not ebooks also have a physical but t on t hat enables or disables t he wireless adapt or.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
27
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.3 Using Wireless MAC Authentication to Block a
Computer’s Access to the Wireless Network
Use M AC Aut he nt ica t ion t o block a com put er from accessing t he wireless net work based on t he
com put er ’s MAC address.
Not e: MAC Aut hent icat ion offers lim it ed securit y.
28
Click W ir e le ss > M AC Filt e r. I n t he M AC Filt e r screen, click Add.
I n t he M AC Addr e ss field, ent er t he MAC address of t he com put er t o block and click Apply/ Sa ve .
The MAC address appears in t he M AC List . Set t he M AC Re st r ict M ode t o D e ny and click Add.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.4 Setting Up a NAT Virtual Server for a Game Server
This exam ples configures a virt ual server t o forward t raffic from Civilizat ion I V players on t he
I nt ernet ( A in t he figure below) t o a server on a com put er behind t he VDSL Rout er.
Not e: I f firewall is enabled, you m ay also need t o configure a fir ewall rule for t he relevant
port s. See Sect ion 2.6.2 on page 34.
Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup
D=192.168.1.34
LAN
WAN
TCP/UDP port 6500
UDP ports 2302 and 13139
Thom as configures virt ual servers t o forward TCP and UDP port 6500, and UDP port s 2302 and
13139 t raffic t o port 6500 at t he server ’s I P address of 192.168.1.34.
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > N AT > Vir t u a l Se r ve r s and t hen Add.
Select t he incom ing int erface for t he t raffic. Specify a nam e ( CivI V in t his exam ple) in t he Cust om
Se r vice field. Set t he Se r ve r I P Addr e ss t o 192.168.1.34. Add UDP port s 2302 and 13139 and
port num ber 6500 for TCP & UD P prot ocols. Click TCP/ UD P.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
29
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Players on t he I nt ernet t hen can access Thom as’ server.
2.5 Access Your Home Computer from the Internet Using
DDNS
I t is inconvenient for you t o access your hom e com put er from t he I nt ernet if your VDSL Rout er uses
a dynam ic WAN I P address since it changes dynam ically. Dynam ic DNS ( DDNS) allows you t o
access your hom e com put er using a dom ain nam e.
Not e: Enable rem ot e deskt op server service on your hom e com put er. The rem ot e deskt op
server feat ure covered here is included in Windows Professional, Business, and
Ult im at e versions.
Not e: I f firewall is enabled, you m ay also need t o configure a fir ewall rule for t he relevant
port s. See Sect ion 2.6.2 on page 34.
30
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
ht t p: / / zyxelrout er.dyndns.org
w.x.y.z
a.b.c.d
To use t his feat ure, apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org or TZO. This t ut orial covers:
• Regist ering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
• Configuring DDNS on Your VDSL Rout er
• Configuring Port Forwarding on your VDSL Rout er
• Test ing t he DDNS Set t ing
Not e: I f you have a privat e WAN I P address, t hen you cannot use DDNS.
2.5.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
Open a browser and t ype ht t p:/ / w w w .dyn dns.or g.
Apply for a user account . This t ut orial uses Use r N a m e 1 and 1 2 3 4 5 as t he usernam e and
password.
Log int o www.dyndns.org using your account .
Add a new DDNS host nam e. This t ut orial uses t he following set t ings as an exam ple.
• Host nam e: zyx e lr out e r .dyndns.or g
• Service Type: H ost w it h I P a ddr e ss
• I P Address: Ent er t he WAN I P address t hat your VDSL Rout er is current ly using. You can find t he
I P address on t he VDSL Rout er’s Web Configurat or St a t u s page.
Then you will need t o configure t he sam e account and host nam e on t he VDSL Rout er lat er.
2.5.2 Configuring DDNS on Your VDSL Router
Configure t he following set t ings in t he Adva nce d Se t up > D N S > D yna m ic D N S > Add screen.
• Select D ynD N S.or g as t he D- DNS provider.
• Type zyx e lr out e r .dyndn s.or g in t he H ost N a m e field.
• Leave t he int erface set t o t he default unless you have configured anot her int erface t o use.
• Ent er t he user nam e ( Use r N a m e 1 ) and password ( 1 2 3 4 5 ) .
• Click Apply/ Sa ve .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
31
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.5.3 Configuring Port Forwarding on your VDSL Router
Configure t he following set t ings in t he Adva nce d Se t up > N AT > Vir t ua l Se r ve r s > Add screen.
• Leave t he int erface set t o t he default unless you have configured anot her int erface t o use.
• Select Cu st om Se r vice and t ype RD in t he field.
• Type t he LAN I P address of your com put er in t he Se r ve r I P Addr e ss field. To check t his on your
hom e com put er, click St a r t , All Pr ogr a m s, Acce ssor ie s and t hen Com m a nd Pr om pt . I n t he
Com m a n d Pr om pt window, t ype " ipconfig" and t hen press [ ENTER] . This exam ple uses
1 9 2 .1 6 8 .1 .6 4 . See Configuring St at ic DHCP t o configure a St at ic DHCP rule for t his I P address.
• Type 3 3 8 9 in t he Ex t e r n a l/ I n t e r n a l St a r t / En d Por t fields. This is t he list ening port for
Windows rem ot e deskt op.
• Select t he TCP in t he Pr ot ocol field.
32
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Click Apply/ Sa ve .
2.5.4 Testing the DDNS Setting
Test your access t o your com put er from t he I nt ernet .
Open t he rem ot e deskt op client applicat ion on t he rem ot e com put er ( using t he I P address a .b.c.d)
t hat is connect ed t o t he I nt ernet .
Type h t t p:/ / zyx e lr ou t e r .dyn dns.or g and press [ Ent er] .
Your com put er ’s rem ot e deskt op login page should appear.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
33
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.6 Configuring the Firewall
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > Fir e w a ll > Ge n e r a l and select Act ive Fir e w a ll t o t urn on Denial of
Service ( DoS) prot ect ion. Select t he default policy’s Act ive check box t o block sessions init iat ed
from t he I nt ernet from com ing in t hrough t he ppp0.1 WAN int erface. Click Apply.
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
2.6.1 Interface Default Policy
Click t he Fir e w a ll > Ge ne r a l screen’s Add but t on t o add an int erface default policy t o block or
allow sessions init iat ed from t he net work connect ed t o an int erface. This exam ple allows sessions
init iat ed from t he I nt ernet t o com e in t hrough t he ppp1.1 WAN int erface.
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
2.6.2 Firewall Rules
Use Fir e w a ll > Rule s t o cont rol t raffic by source and dest inat ion I P address and port .
Not e: You m ay need t o configure a firewall rule for t he relevant port s if you use a NAT
virt ual server or DMZ host .
34
Click Add t o creat e a new rule.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
This exam ple allows incom ing TCP or UDP port 6500 t raffic from int erface ppp0.1.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
35
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Select Customized Services
Your new rule displays in t he list .
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
2.7 LAN DHCP for IP Addressing Assignment
The following exam ple shows how t o configure LAN DHCP set t ings.
Click Adva nce d Se t up > LAN t o display t he LAN set t ings. Under t he Ena ble D H CP Se r ve r opt ion
change t he DHCP server I P address range. Set Le a se d Tim e t o specify how long t o lease an I P
address t o a LAN com put er. Click Apply/ Sa ve .
36
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
2.7.1 Configuring Static DHCP
Use st at ic DHCP t o have t he VDSL Rout er always give t he sam e I P address t o a specific com put er.
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > LAN t o display t he LAN set t ings. Under t he St a t ic I P Le a se List , click
Add Ent r ie s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
37
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
Ent er t he com put er ’s MAC address and t he LAN I P address t o give t he com put er and click Apply/
Sa ve .
2.8 Checking the Software Version
Click . The D e vice I n fo. The screen displays t he version of t he soft ware inst alled on t he VDSL
Rout er.
38
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
2.9 Restoring to Factory Default
This procedure rest ores t he fact ory default set t ings t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Click M a n a ge m e nt > Re st or e D e fa u lt > Re st or e D e fa ult Se t t ings.
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
Click OK.
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
The rest ore screen displays.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
39
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Not e: The Pow er LED flashes and st ays on green when ready t o reconfigure. Follow t he
inst ruct ions provided by your I SP t o repr ogram your m odem .
Not e: The VDSL Rout er’s back st icker displays t he default LAN I P address, usernam e, and
password.
Firewall Example: Edit Rule: Destination Address
2.10 How to Use File Sharing on the VDSL Router
These sect ions cover how t o use file sharing t o allow LAN users t o access a USB st orage device
connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er as if it was direct ly connect ed t o t heir com put ers.
Not e: Rem em ber t o cont rol physical access t o t he USB drive so som eone doesn’t access
files by sim ply connect ing it t o a com put er.
2.10.1 Set Up File Sharing
40
Connect your USB device t o t he USB port at t he back panel of t he VDSL Rout er.
Click Adva nce d Se t up > USB Se r vice s > File Sha r ing and enable file sharing. Click Add n e w
use r t o set up a new file sharing user account .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Ent er a user nam e and password and click Apply.
Disable t he root account and click Apply/ Sa ve .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
41
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.10.2 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer
Not e: This exam ple uses Microsoft ’s Windows 7 t o browse your shared files.
Open Windows Explorer and in t he address bar t ype a double backslash “ \ \ ” followed by t he VDSL
Rout er’s LAN I P address and press [ ENTER] .
A login screen displays. Type t he user nam e and password you set up for file sharing and click OK.
Not e: Once you log int o t he file share via your VDSL Rout er, you do not have t o log in
again unless you rest art your com put er or t he VDSL Rout er.
42
Double- click t he usbsha r e folder and browser it s cont ent s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.11 Using the Media Server Feature
The m edia server st ream s video, m usic, and phot o files from a USB st orage device t o DLNAcom pliant m edia client s on your net work. Connect t he USB st orage device t o t he VDSL Rout er’s
USB port . This sect ion gives exam ples of using t he m edia server wit h t he following m edia client s:
• Microsoft ( MS) Windows Media Player
• ZyXEL DMA- 2500, a digit al m edia adapt er - see t he DMA- 2500 Quick St art Guide t o set up t he
DMA- 2500 t o work wit h your t elevision ( TV) before using t he inst ruct ions here.
2.11.1 Configuring the VDSL Router
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > USB Se r vice s > M e dia Se r ve r. The digit al m edia server set t ings
display. Enable t he digit al m edia server and click Apply/ Sa ve .
Tutorial: USB Services > Media Server
2.11.2 Using Windows Media Player
This sect ion shows you how t o play t he m edia files on t he USB st orage device connect ed t o your
VDSL Rout er using Windows Media Player.
Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using Windows Media Player)
USB Storage Device
Computer with
Windows Media Player
VDSL Router
2.11.2.1 Windows Vista
Open Windows Media Player and click Libr a r y > M e dia Sha r ing as follows.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
43
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista
Select Find m e dia t ha t ot he r s a r e sh a r ing in t he following screen and click OK.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (2)
44
The VDSL Rout er displays as a playlist in t he Libr a r y screen’s left panel. Click t he cat egory icons in
t he right panel t o display t he m edia files in t he USB st orage device at t ached t o your VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows Vista (3)
P8701T
P8701T
2.11.2.2 Windows 7
Open Windows Media Player. I t aut om at ically det ect s t he VDSL Rout er. Right- click Ot h e r Libr a r ie s
> Re fr e sh Ot h e r Libr a r ie s if t he VDSL Rout er does not display in t he left panel.
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (1)
P8701T
P8701T
Select a cat egory and wait for Windows Media Player t o list t he files available.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
45
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Tutorial: Media Sharing using Windows 7 (2)
P8701T
P8701T
2.11.3 Using a Digital Media Adapter
This sect ion shows you how t o use a ZyXEL DMA- 2500 t o play m edia files in a USB st orage device
connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Not e: Set up your DMA- 2500 wit h t he TV according t o t he inst ruct ions in t he DMA- 2500
Quick St art Guide before using t his t ut orial.
Connect t he DMA- 2500 t o an available LAN port on your VDSL Rout er.
Tutorial: Media Server Setup (Using DMA)
USB Storage Device
DMA-2500
VDSL Router
46
Turn on t he TV and wait for t he DMA- 2500 H om e screen t o appear. Using t he rem ot e cont rol, go t o
M yM e dia t o open t he following screen. Select t he VDSL Rout er as your m edia server.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500
The screen list s available m edia files in t he USB st orage device. Select a file and push t he Pla y
but t on in t he rem ot e cont rol t o open it .
Tutorial: Media Sharing using DMA-2500 (2)
2.12 How to Share a USB Printer via Your VDSL Router
Your VDSL Rout er can act as a print server and let t he com put ers on your net work use t he USB
print er connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er’s USB port .
Go t o Adva nce d Se t up > USB Se r vice s > t o enable t he print server funct ion on t he VDSL Rout er.
Ent er t he print er ’s nam e and m anufact urer and m odel num ber. Click Apply/ Sa ve t o save your
set t ings.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
47
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Connect t he USB print er t o t he VDSL Rout er if you have not done so already.
See Sect ion 2.12.1 on page 48 and/ or Sect ion 2.12.2 on page 52 for exam ples of how t o set up a
print er on your com put er. The com put ers on your net work m ust have t he print er soft ware already
inst alled before t hey can use t he print er.
Not e: Your print er ’s inst allat ion inst ruct ions m ay ask t hat you connect t he print er t o your
com put er. Connect t he print er t o t he VDSL Rout er inst ead.
2.12.1 Add a New Printer Using Windows
This exam ple shows how t o connect a print er behind t he VDSL Rout er t o a com put er using t he
Windows XP Professional. Som e m enu it em s m ay look different on your operat ing syst em .
48
Click St a r t > Cont r ol Pa ne l > Pr int e r s a nd Fa x e s t o open t he Pr in t e r s a n d Fa x e s screen. Click
Add a Pr int e r.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
The Add Pr int e r W iza r d screen displays. Click N e x t .
Select A n e t w or k pr int e r , or a pr in t e r a t t a che d t o a not he r com put e r and click N e x t .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
49
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Select Con ne ct t o a pr int e r on t he I n t e r ne t or on a h om e or office ne t w or k : and ent er
“ ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1: 631/ print ers/ USB_PRI NTER” as t he URL t o access t he print server ( VDSL
Rout er) . Click N e x t .
Not e: I f you change t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address, use t he new I P address in t he URL
t o access t he print server.
50
Select t he m ake of t he print er t hat you want t o connect t o t he print server in t he M a n ufa ct u r e r list
of print ers.
Select t he print er m odel from t he list of Pr int e r s.
I f your print er is not displayed in t he list of Pr in t e r s, insert t he print er driver inst allat ion CD/ disk or
download t he driver file t o your com put er, click H a ve D isk … and inst all t he new print er driver.
Click N e x t t o cont inue.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Select Ye s t o use t his print er as t he default print er on your com put er. Ot herwise select N o. Click
N e x t t o cont inue.
10 The following screen shows your current print er set t ings. Select Finish t o com plet e adding a new
print er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
51
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
2.12.2 Add a New Printer Using Macintosh OS X
Com plet e t he following st eps t o set up a print server driver on your Macint osh com put er.
2.12.2.1 Mac OS 10.3 and 10.4
This exam ple shows how t o connect a print er behind t he VDSL Rout er t o your com put er using Mac
OS X v10.4.11. Som e m enu it em s m ay look different on your operat ing syst em .
52
Click t he Finder icon on t he Dock ( a place holding a series of icons/ short cut s at t he bot t om of t he
deskt op) or double- click your Mac hard disk icon ( M a c OS X in t his exam ple) on your deskt op.
The Mac HD window displays. Open t he Applica t ions folder.
Open t he Ut ilit ie s folder.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Double- click t he Pr int e r Se t u p Ut ilit y icon.
Click t he Add icon at t he t op of t he screen.
Click t he I P Pr in t e r t ab t o set up your print er.
• Press t he alt key and click M or e Pr int e r s in t he Pr int e r Br ow se r screen.
• Select Adva nce d from t he t op drop- down list .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
53
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
• Select I nt e r ne t Pr int ing Pr ot ocol u sing H TTP from t he D e vice drop- down list .
• Ent er a descript ive nam e for t he print er in t he D e vice N a m e field.
• I n t he D e vice URL field, ent er “ ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1: 631/ print ers/ USB_PRI NTER” as t he
URL t o access t he print server ( VDSL Rout er) .
Not e: I f you change t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address, use t he new I P address in t he URL
t o access t he print server.
• Select your print er m anufact urer from t he Pr int e r M ode l drop- down list and t hen select a
print er m odel. Click Add t o save and close t he Pr in t e r Br ow se r configurat ion screen.
The new net work print er displays in t he Pr in t e r List . The default print er N a m e displays in bold
t ype.
Your print server driver set up is com plet e. You can now use t he VDSL Rout er’s print server t o print
from a Mac com put er.
2.12.2.2 Mac OS 10.5 and 10.6
This exam ple shows how t o connect a print er behind t he VDSL Rout er t o your com put er using Mac
OS X v10.6.2. Som e m enu it em s m ay look different on your operat ing syst em .
54
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Click t he Finder icon on t he Dock or double- click your Mac hard disk icon ( M a c OS X in t his
exam ple) on your deskt op t o open t he Mac HD window.
Open t he Applica t ions folder.
Double- click t he Syst e m Pr e fe r e nce s icon.
Click t he Pr in t & Fa x icon.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
55
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
Select t he Pr in t in g t ab and click t he + icon t o add a new print er.
Click t he Adva nce d but t on on t he Add Pr int e r t oolbar t o set up your print er.
I f t he Adva nce d but t on doesn’t appear, Ct rl- click t he t oolbar, select Cu st om ize Toolba r ... and
t hen drag t he Adva nce d but t on ont o t he t oolbar.
• Select I nt e r ne t Pr int ing Pr ot ocol ( H TTP) from t he Type drop- down list .
• Select Anot he r D e vice from t he D e vice drop- down list .
• I n t he URL field, ent er “ ht t p: / / 192.168.1.1: 631/ print ers/ USB_PRI NTER” as t he URL t o
access t he print server ( VDSL Rout er) .
Not e: I f you change t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address, use t he new I P address in t he URL
t o access t he print server.
• Ent er a descript ive nam e for t he print er and where it is locat ed.
56
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
• Select your print er m anufact urer from t he Pr in t Usin g drop- down list and t hen select a
print er m odel. Click Add t o save and close t he Pr in t e r Br ow se r configurat ion screen.
The new net work print er displays in t he Pr int e r s list .
Your print server driver set up is com plet e. You can now use t he VDSL Rout er’s print server t o print
from a Mac com put er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
57
Chapter 2 User Setup Guide
58
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
59
60
C HAPT ER
Device Info Screens
3.1 Overview
Use t he D e vice I n fo screens t o look at t he current st at us of t he Device, syst em resources,
int erfaces ( LAN, WAN, and WLAN) , and SI P account regist rat ion st at us.
3.2 The Device Info Summary Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or or click D e vice I n fo > Sum m a r y t o view a sum m ary
screen of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er.
Figure 4 Device I nfo Sum m ary Screen
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
61
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 2 Device I nfo Sum m ary Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Board I D
This field displays t he I D num ber of t he circuit board in t he VDSL Rout er.
Sym m et ric CPU
Threads
This field displays t he num ber of t hreads in t he VDSL Rout er’s CPU.
Build
Tim est am p
This field displays t he dat e ( YYMMDD) and t im e ( HHMM) of t he firm ware in t he VDSL Rout er.
Soft ware
Version
This field displays t he current version of t he firm ware inside t he VDSL Rout er.
Boot loader
( CFE) Version
This field displays t he version of boot loader t he VDSL Rout er is using.
DSL PHY and
Driver Version
This field displays t he version of t he m odem code t he VDSL Rout er is using.
Wireless Driver
Version
This field displays t he version of t he driver for t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless chipset .
Upt im e
This field displays how long t he VDSL Rout er has been running since it last st art ed up.
Line Rat e Upst ream
This field displays t he WAN port ’s sending t raffic speed.
Line Rat e Downst ream
This field displays t he WAN port ’s receiving t raffic speed.
LAN I Pv4
Address
This field displays t he current I P address of t he VDSL Rout er in t he LAN.
Default
Gat eway
This field displays t he I P address of t he gat eway t hrough which t he VDSL Rout er sends
t raffic unless it m at ches a st at ic rout e.
Prim ary DNS
Server
The VDSL Rout er t ries t his DNS server first when it needs t o resolve a dom ain nam e int o a
num eric I P address.
Secondary DNS
Server
The VDSL Rout er uses t his DNS server first when it needs t o resolve a dom ain nam e int o a
num eric I P address if t he prim ary DNS server does not respond.
LAN I Pv6
Address
( Global)
This field displays t he current global I Pv6 address of t he VDSL Rout er.
LAN I Pv6
Address ( Link)
This field displays t he current I Pv6 address of t he VDSL Rout er in t he LAN.
Default I Pv6
Gat eway
This field displays t he I Pv6 address of t he gat eway t hrough which t he VDSL Rout er sends
I Pv6 t raffic unless it m at ches a st at ic rout e.
Dat e/ Tim e
This field displays t he VDSL Rout er’s current day of t he week, m ont h, hour, m inut e, second,
and year.
Regist rat ion St at us
62
Account
This colum n displays each SI P account in t he VDSL Rout er.
ServiceProvider/ SI P
Account
Num ber
This colum n displays t he service provider nam e and SI P num ber for each SI P
account .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Table 2 Device I nfo Sum m ary Screen ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Act ion
I f t he SI P account is already regist ered wit h t he SI P server, t he Accoun t St a t us
field displays Re gist e r e d.
•
Click Un r e gist e r t o delet e t he SI P account ’s regist rat ion in t he SI P server. This
does not cancel your SI P account , but it delet es t he m apping bet ween your SI P
ident it y and your I P address or dom ain nam e.
I f t he SI P account is not regist ered wit h t he SI P server, t he Accou nt St a t us field
displays N ot Re gist e r e d.
•
Click Re gist e r t o have t he VDSL Rout er at t em pt t o regist er t he SI P account
wit h t he SI P server.
The but t on is grayed out if t he SI P account is disabled.
Account St at us
This field displays t he current regist rat ion st at us of t he SI P account . You have t o
regist er SI P account s wit h a SI P server t o use VoI P.
I n a ct ive - The SI P account is not act ive. You can act ivat e it in VoI P > SI P > SI P
Account .
N ot Re gist e r e d - The last t im e t he VDSL Rout er t ried t o regist er t he SI P account
wit h t he SI P server, t he at t em pt failed. Use t he Re gist e r but t on t o regist er t he
account again. The VDSL Rout er aut om at ically t ries t o regist er t he SI P account
when you t urn on t he VDSL Rout er or when you act ivat e it .
Re gist e r e d - The SI P account is already regist ered wit h t he SI P server. You can
use it t o m ake a VoI P call.
URI
This field displays t he account num ber and service dom ain of t he SI P account . You
can change t hese in t he VoI P > SI P screens.
3.3 The WAN Info Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > W AN t o view a sum m ary
screen of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er’s WAN connect ions.
Figure 5 WAN I nfo Screen
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
63
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 3 WAN I nfo Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
This shows t he nam e of t he int erface used by t his connect ion.
A default nam e ipoa * , pppoa * , a t m * or pt m * indicat es DSL port . The ppp* indicat es a
PPP connect ion via any one of t he WAN int erface.
The num ber aft er t he dot ( .) represent s t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent
t hrough t his connect ion. The num ber aft er t he underscore ( _ ) represent s t he index num ber
of connect ions t hrough t he sam e int erface.
( n u ll) m eans t he ent ry is not valid.
Descript ion
This is t he se r vice n a m e of t h is con n e ct ion.
0 and 3 5 or 0 and 1 are t he default VPI and VCI num bers. The last num ber represent s t he
index num ber of connect ions over t he sam e PVC or t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic
sent t hrough t his connect ion.
( n u ll) m eans t he ent ry is not valid.
Type
This shows t he m et hod of encapsulat ion used by t his connect ion.
VlanMuxI D
This indicat es t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent t hrough t his connect ion. This
displays N / A w hen t here is no VLAN I D num ber assigned.
I Pv6
This displays whet her or not I Pv6 is enabled on t he int erface.
I gm p
This shows whet her I GMP ( I nt ernet Group Mult icast Prot ocol) is act ivat ed or not for t his
connect ion. I GMP is not available when t he connect ion uses t he bridging service.
MLD
This shows whet her Mult icast List ener Discovery ( MLD) is act ivat ed or not for t his
connect ion. MLD is not available when t he connect ion uses t he bridging service.
NAT
This shows whet her NAT is act ivat ed or not for t his int erface. NAT is not available when t he
connect ion uses t he bridging service.
St at us
This displays t he connect ion st at e or Un con figu r e d if t he int erface has not yet been
configured.
I Pv4 Address
This displays t he int erface’s current I Pv4 address if it has one. Click conne ct t o init iat e t he
WAN int erface’s connect ion.
I Pv6 Address
This displays t he int erface’s current I Pv6 address if it has one. Click conne ct t o init iat e t he
WAN int erface’s connect ion.
3.4 The 3G Status Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I n fo > 3 G t o view a sum m ary screen
of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er’s 3G connect ion.
64
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Figure 6 3G St at us Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 4 3G St at us Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
St at us
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N oD e vice when no 3G card is insert ed,
D isa ble d when t he 3G WAN is not act ivat ed,
Up when t he 3G connect ion is up,
D ow n when t he 3G connect ion is down,
N oRe sponse when t here is no response from t he insert ed 3G card,
I n va lidPI N if t he PI N code you ent ered in t he W AN > 3 G Ba ck u p screen is not t he
right one for t he 3G card you insert ed,
N e e dPUK if you ent er t he PI N ( Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber) code incorrect ly for
t hree t im es and t he SI M card is blocked by your I SP,
D ia lFa il when t he VDSL Rout er fails t o dial up a 3G connect ion.
or I n va lidSI M when t he SI M card is dam aged or not insert ed.
I f a link displays in t his field, click t he link t o view m ore st at us inform at ion or ent er t he
correct PI N or PUK ( Personal Unblocking Key) code.
Service
Provider
This displays t he nam e of your 3G net work service provider.
Signal St rengt h
This displays t he 3G connect ion’s signal qualit y.
Connect ion
Upt im e
This displays how long t he 3G connect ion has been connect ed since it last cam e up.
3G Card
Manufact urer
This displays t he nam e of t he com pany t hat produced t he 3G USB dongle.
3G Card Model
This displays t he m odel nam e of t he 3G USB dongle.
3G Card F/ W
Version
This displays t he soft ware version of t he 3G USB dongle.
3G Card I MEI
I MEI ( I nt ernat ional Mobile Equipm ent I dent it y) is a 15- digit code in decim al form at t hat
ident ifies t he 3G device.
SI M Card I MSI
I MSI ( I nt ernat ional Mobile Subscriber I dent it y) is a 15- digit code t hat ident ifies t he SI M
card.
3.5 The LAN Statistics Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > St a t ist ics > LAN t o view a
sum m ary screen of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN connect ions.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
65
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Figure 7 LAN St at ist ics Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 5 LAN St at ist ics Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
These fields ident ify t he LAN int erfaces. e t h 0 ~ e t h 3 represent t he et hernet LAN port s 1 ~
4. w lo represent s t he wireless LAN int erface.
Received /
Transm it t ed
These fields display t he num ber of byt es, packet s, error packet s, and dropped packet s for
each int erface.
Received
Byt es
This indicat es t he num ber of byt es received on t his int erface.
Pkt s
This indicat es t he num ber of packet s received on t his int erface.
Errs
This indicat es t he num ber of fram es wit h errors received on t his int erface.
Drops
This indicat es t he num ber of received packet s dropped on t his int erface.
Transm it t ed
Byt es
This indicat es t he num ber of byt es t ransm it t ed on t his int erface.
Pkt s
This indicat es t he num ber of t ransm it t ed packet s on t his int erface.
Errs
This indicat es t he num ber of fram es wit h errors t ransm it t ed on t his int erface.
Drops
This indicat es t he num ber of out going packet s dropped on t his int erface.
Reset St at ist ics
Click t his t o clear t he screen’s st at ist ics count ers.
3.6 The WAN Statistics Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > St a t ist ics > W AN Se r vice
t o view a sum m ary screen of inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er’s WAN connect ions.
66
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Figure 8 WAN St at ist ics Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 6 WAN St at ist ics Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
This shows t he nam e of t he WAN int erface used by t his connect ion.
The default nam e ipoa * , pppoa * , a t m * or pt m * indicat es t he DSL port . ppp* indicat es a
PPP connect ion via any one of t he WAN int erfaces. ppp3 G0 indicat es a PPP connect ion
t hrough t he 3G int erface.
The num ber aft er t he dot ( .) represent s t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent
t hrough t his connect ion. The num ber aft er t he underscore ( _ ) represent s t he index num ber
of connect ions t hrough t he sam e int erface.
( n u ll) m eans t he ent ry is not valid.
Descript ion
This shows t he descript ive nam e of t his connect ion.
ATM int erfaces include t he VPI and VCI . 0 and 3 5 or 0 and 1 are t he default VPI and VCI
num bers. The last num ber represent s t he index num ber of connect ions over t he sam e PVC
or t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent t hrough t his connect ion.
( n u ll) m eans t he ent ry is not valid.
Received
Byt es
This indicat es t he num ber of byt es received on t his int erface.
Pkt s
This indicat es t he num ber of packet s received on t his int erface.
Errs
This indicat es t he num ber of fram es wit h errors received on t his int erface.
Drops
This indicat es t he num ber of received packet s dropped on t his int erface.
Transm it t ed
Byt es
This indicat es t he num ber of byt es t ransm it t ed on t his int erface.
Pkt s
This indicat es t he num ber of t ransm it t ed packet s on t his int erface.
Errs
This indicat es t he num ber of fram es wit h errors t ransm it t ed on t his int erface.
Drops
This indicat es t he num ber of out going packet s dropped on t his int erface.
Reset St at ist ics
Click t his t o clear t he screen’s st at ist ics count ers.
3.7 The xTM Statistics Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > St a t ist ics > x TM t o display
ATM or PTM connect ion inform at ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
67
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Figure 9 xTM St at ist ics Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 7 xTM St at ist ics Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Port Num ber
This ident ifies t he ATM or PTM port .
I n Oct et s
This displays t he num ber of 8- bit binary digit s ( byt es) received t hrough t he port .
Out Oct et s
This displays t he num ber of 8- bit binary digit s ( byt es) sent t hrough t he port .
I n Packet s
This displays t he num ber of packet s received t hrough t he port .
Out Packet s
This displays t he num ber of packet s sent t hrough t he port .
I n OAM Cells
This displays t he num ber of OAM ( Operat ional, Adm inist rat ion and Maint enance) cells
received t hrough t he port .
Out OAM Cells
This displays t he num ber of OAM cells sent t hrough t he port .
I n ASM Cells
This displays t he num ber of ASM ( Aut onom ous St at us Message) cells received t hrough t he
port .
Out ASM Cells
This displays t he num ber of ASM cells sent t hrough t he port .
I n Packet Errors
This displays t he num ber of errored packet s received on t he port .
I n Cell Errors
This displays t he num ber of errored cells received on t he port .
Reset
Click t his t o clear t he screen’s st at ist ics count ers.
3.8 The xDSL Statistics Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > St a t ist ics > x D SL t o display
inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er’s VDSL or ADSL connect ions.
68
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Figure 10 xDSL St at ist ics Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 8 xDSL St at ist ics Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mode
This field ident ifies t he DSL m ode of t he DSL connect ion.
Traffic Type
This displays t he t ype of t raffic t he DSL port is sending and receiving.
St at us
This displays t he current st at e of set t ing up t he DSL connect ion.
Link Power
St at e
This displays t he DSL connect ion’s current power usage or power saving m ode. n u ll displays
when t here is no DSL connect ion.
Downst ream
These are t he st at ist ics for t he t raffic direct ion com ing int o t he port from t he service
provider.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
69
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Table 8 xDSL St at ist ics Screen ( cont inued)
70
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Upst ream
These are t he st at ist ics for t he t raffic direct ion going out from t he port t o t he service
provider.
Line Coding
( Trellis)
This displays whet her or not t he port is using Trellis coding for t raffic. Trellis coding helps t o
reduce t he noise in ADSL t ransm issions. Trellis m ay reduce t hroughput but it m akes t he
connect ion m ore st able.
SNR Margin
( 0.1 dB)
This displays t he Signal- t o- Noise Rat io m argin ( in 0.1 dB) . A DMT sub- carrier ’s SNR is t he
rat io bet ween t he received signal power and t he received noise power. The signal- t o- noise
rat io m argin is t he m axim um t hat t he received noise power could increase wit h t he syst em
st ill being able t o m eet it s t ransm ission t arget s.
At t enuat ion
( 0.1 dB)
This displays t he line at t enuat ion, m easured in t ent hs of a decibel ( 0.1 dB) . This at t enuat ion
is t he difference bet ween t he power t ransm it t ed at t he near- end and t he power received at
t he far- end. At t enuat ion is affect ed by t he channel charact erist ics ( wire gauge, qualit y,
condit ion and lengt h of t he physical line) .
Out put Pow er
( 0.1 dBm )
This displays t he far end act ual aggregat e t ransm it power ( in dBm ) . Downst ream is how
m uch port t he service provider is using t o t ransm it t o t he port . Upst ream is how m uch
power t he port is using t o t ransm it t o t he service provider.
At t ainable Rat e
( Kbps) :
These are t he highest t heoret ically possible t ransfer rat es at which t he port could send and
receive dat a.
Rat e ( Kbps)
This displays t he dat a t ransfer rat es at which t he port is receiving and sending.
Super Fram es
This displays t he num ber of ADSL superfram es t he DSL connect ion received and
t ransm it t ed. Each superfram e cont ains 68 ADSL dat a fram es and a one- fram e synch sym bol
for a t ot al num ber of 69 fram es.
Super Fram e
Errors
This displays t he num ber of errored ADSL superfram es t he DSL connect ion received and
t ransm it t ed.
RS Words
This displays t he num ber of Reed Solom on error correct ion words for received and
t ransm it t ed t raffic.
RS Correct able
Errors
This displays t he num ber of errored packet s correct ed by Reed Solom on error correct ion for
received and t ransm it t ed t raffic.
RS
Uncorrect able
Errors
This displays t he num ber of errored packet s t hat Reed Solom on error correct ion could not
correct for received and t ransm it t ed t raffic.
HEC Errors
Header Error Cont rol ( HEC) checks for errors in packet headers.
OCD Errors
The num ber of Out of Cell Delineat ion errors for received and t ransm it t ed t raffic. An OCD
error m eans seven consecut ive ATM cells had Header Error Cont rol ( HEC) violat ions.
LCD Errors
The num ber of Loss of Cell Delineat ion errors for received and t ransm it t ed t raffic. An LCD
st at e m eans an OCD condit ion persist ed for 4 m illiseconds.
Tot al Cells
This displays t he t ot al num ber of DSL cells including headers.
Dat a Cells
This displays t he num ber of dat a payload DSL cells, excluding headers.
Bit Errors
This displays t he num ber of errored bit s.
Tot al ES
This displays t he num ber of Errored Seconds m eaning t he num ber of seconds cont aining at
least one errored block or at least one defect .
Tot al SES
This displays t he num ber of Severely Errored Seconds m eaning t he num ber of seconds
cont aining 30% or m ore errored blocks or at least one defect . This is a subset of ES.
Tot al UAS
This displays t he num ber of UnAvailable Seconds.
xDSL BER Test
Click t his t o open a screen where you can perform a ADSL Bit Error Rat e ( BER) t est t o
det erm ine t he qualit y of t he ADSL connect ion.
Reset St at ist ics
Click t his t o clear t he screen’s st at ist ics count ers.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
3.8.1 The ADSL BER Test Screen
Do t he following while t he VDSL Rout er has an ADSL connect ion t o perform a ADSL Bit Error Rat e
( BER) t est t o det erm ine t he qualit y of t he ADSL connect ion.
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > St a t ist ics > x D SL > x D SL
BER Te st t o display t his screen. Select a t est durat ion and click St a r t .
Click St op t o finish t he t est .
The t est result s display including t he t est ’s durat ion, t he num ber of bit s t ransferred, t he num ber of
errored bit s, and t he rat io of errored bit s t o t ransm it t ed bit s.
3.9 The Route Info Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > Rout e t o display t he VDSL
Rout er’s rout ing t able.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
71
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
Figure 11 Rout e I nfo Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 9 Rout e I nfo Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dest inat ion
This displays t he I P address t o which t his ent ry applies.
Gat eway
This displays t he gat eway t he VDSL Rout er uses t o send t raffic t o t he ent ry’s dest inat ion
address.
Subnet Mask
This displays t he subnet m ask of t he dest inat ion net .
Flag
This displays whet her t he rout e is up ( U) , t he VDSL Rout er drops packet s for t his
dest inat ion ( !) , t he rout e uses a gat eway ( G) , t he t arget is a host ( H ) , reinst at e rout e for
dynam ic rout ing ( R) , t he rout e was dynam ically inst alled by redirect ( D ) , or m odified from
redirect ( M ) .
Met ric
The m et ric represent s t he “ cost ” of t ransm ission for rout ing purposes. I P rout ing uses hop
count as t he m easurem ent of cost , wit h a m inim um of 1 for direct ly- connect ed net works.
Service
The nam e of a specific service t o w hich t he rout e applies if one is specified.
I nt erface
The int erface t hrough which t his rout e sends t raffic.
3.10 The ARP Info Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > ARP t o display Address
Resolut ion Prot ocol inform at ion. This screen list s t he I P addresses t he VDSL Rout er has m apped t o
MAC addresses.
Figure 12 ARP I nfo Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 10 ARP I nfo Screen
72
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P address
The learned I P address of a device connect ed t o one of t he syst em ’s port s.
Flags
St a t ic - st at ic ent ry, D yn a m ic - dynam ic ent ry t hat is not yet com plet e, Com ple t e dynam ic ent ry t hat is com plet e.
HW Address
The MAC address of t he device wit h t he list ed I P address.
Device
The int erface t hrough which t he VDSL Rout er sends t raffic t o t he device list ed in t he ent ry.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
3.11 The DHCP Leases Screen
Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s web configurat or and click D e vice I nfo > D H CP t o display t he VDSL
Rout er’s list of I P address current ly leased t o DHCP client s.
Figure 13 DHCP Leases Screen
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 11 DHCP Leases Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Host nam e
This field displays t he nam e used t o ident ify t his device on t he net work ( t he com put er
nam e) . The VDSL Rout er learns t hese from t he DHCP client request s. “ None” shows here for
a st at ic DHCP ent ry.
MAC Address
This field displays t he MAC address t o which t he I P address is current ly assigned or for
which t he I P address is reserved. Click t he colum n’s heading cell t o sort t he t able ent ries by
MAC address. Click t he heading cell again t o reverse t he sort order.
I P Address
This field displays t he I P address current ly assigned t o a DHCP client or reserved for a
specific MAC address. Click t he colum n’s heading cell t o sort t he t able ent ries by I P address.
Click t he heading cell again t o reverse t he sort order.
Expires I n
This field displays how m uch longer t he I P address is leased t o t he DHCP client .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
73
Chapter 3 Device Info Screens
74
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
WAN
4.1 Overview
This chapt er discusses t he VDSL Rout er’s W AN screens. Use t hese screens t o configure your VDSL
Rout er for I nt ernet access.
A WAN ( Wide Area Net work) connect ion is an out side connect ion t o anot her net work or t he
I nt ernet . I t connect s your privat e net works, such as a LAN ( Local Area Net work) and ot her
net works, so t hat a com put er in one locat ion can com m unicat e wit h com put ers in ot her locat ions.
Figure 14 LAN and WAN
WAN
3G ( t hird generat ion) st andards for t he sending and receiving of voice, video, and dat a in a m obile
environm ent .
You can at t ach a 3G wireless adapt er t o t he USB port and set t he VDSL Rout er t o use t his 3G
connect ion as your WAN or a backup when t he wired WAN connect ion fails.
Figure 15 3G WAN Connect ion
4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he La ye r 2 I nt e r fa ce screens t o view, rem ove or add layer- 2 WAN int erfaces ( Sect ion 4.2
on page 78 and Sect ion 4.3 on page 81) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
75
Chapter 4 WAN
• Use t he W AN Se r vice screens t o view, rem ove or add a WAN int erface. You can also configure
t he WAN set t ings on t he VDSL Rout er for I nt ernet access ( Sect ion 4.4 on page 83) .
• Use t he 3 G Ba ck up screen t o configure 3G WAN connect ion ( Sect ion 4.5 on page 97) .
Table 12 WAN Set up Overview
LAYER-2 INTERFACE
CONNECTION
ADSL/ VDSL
over PTM
ADSL over ATM
INTERNET CONNECTION
DSL LINK
TYPE
MODE
ENCAPSULATION
CONNECTION SETTINGS
N/ A
Rout ing
PPPoE
PPP inform at ion, I Pv4/ I Pv6 I P
address, rout ing feat ure, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
I PoE
I Pv4/ I Pv6 I P address, rout ing
feat ure, DNS server, VLAN, QoS,
and MTU
Bridge
N/ A
VLAN and QoS
Rout ing
PPPoE/ PPP0A
ATM PCV configurat ion, PPP
inform at ion, I Pv4/ I Pv6 I P address,
rout ing feat ure, DNS server, VLAN,
QoS, and MTU
I PoE/ I PoA
ATM PCV configurat ion, I Pv4/ I Pv6
I P address, rout ing feat ure, DNS
server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
N/ A
ATM PCV configurat ion, and QoS
EoA
Bridge
4.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t his chapt er.
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulat ion is used t o include dat a from an upper layer prot ocol int o a lower layer prot ocol. To set
up a WAN connect ion t o t he I nt ernet , you need t o use t he sam e encapsulat ion m et hod used by your
I SP ( I nt ernet Service Provider) . I f your I SP offers a dial- up I nt ernet connect ion using PPPoE ( PPP
over Et hernet ) , t hey should also provide a usernam e and password ( and service nam e) for user
aut hent icat ion.
WAN IP Address
The WAN I P address is an I P address for t he VDSL Rout er, which m akes it accessible from an
out side net work. I t is used by t he VDSL Rout er t o com m unicat e wit h ot her devices in ot her
net works. I t can be st at ic ( fixed) or dynam ically assigned by t he I SP each t im e t he VDSL Rout er
t ries t o access t he I nt ernet .
I f your I SP assigns you a st at ic WAN I P address, t hey should also assign you t he subnet m ask and
DNS server I P address( es) .
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode ( ATM) is a WAN net working t echnology t hat provides high- speed dat a
t ransfer. ATM uses fixed- size packet s of inform at ion called cells. Wit h ATM, a high QoS ( Qualit y of
76
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Service) can be guarant eed. ATM uses a connect ion- orient ed m odel and est ablishes a virt ual circuit
( VC) bet ween Finding Out More
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode ( PTM) is packet- orient ed and support ed by t he VDSL2 st andard. I n PTM,
packet s are encapsulat ed direct ly in t he High- level Dat a Link Cont rol ( HDLC) fram es. I t is designed
t o provide a low- overhead, t ransparent way of t ransport ing packet s over DSL links, as an
alt ernat ive t o ATM.
3G
3G ( Third Generat ion) is a digit al, packet- swit ched wireless t echnology. Bandwidt h usage is
opt im ized as m ult iple users share t he sam e channel and bandwidt h is only allocat ed t o users when
t hey send dat a. I t allows fast t ransfer of voice and non- voice dat a and provides broadband I nt ernet
access t o m obile devices.
IPv6 Introduction
I Pv6 ( I nt ernet Prot ocol version 6) , is designed t o enhance I P address size and feat ures. The
increase in I Pv6 address size t o 128 bit s ( from t he 32- bit I Pv4 address) allows up t o 3.4 x 10 38 I P
addresses. The VDSL Rout er can use I Pv4/ I Pv6 dual st ack t o connect t o I Pv4 and I Pv6 net works,
and support s I Pv6 rapid deploym ent ( 6RD) .
IPv6 Addressing
The 128- bit I Pv6 address is writ t en as eight 16- bit hexadecim al blocks separat ed by colons ( : ) . This
is an exam ple I Pv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
I Pv6 addresses can be abbreviat ed in t wo ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be om it t ed. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be writ t en as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any num ber of consecut ive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an I Pv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
writ t en as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Sim ilar t o an I Pv4 subnet m ask, I Pv6 uses an address prefix t o represent t he net work address. An
I Pv6 prefix lengt h specifies how m any m ost significant bit s ( st art from t he left ) in t he address
com pose t he net work address. The prefix lengt h is writ t en as “ / x” where x is a num ber. For
exam ple,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
m eans t hat t he first 32 bit s ( 2001:db8) is t he subnet prefix.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
77
Chapter 4 WAN
IPv6 Subnet Masking
Bot h an I Pv6 address and I Pv6 subnet m ask com pose of 128- bit binary digit s, which are divided
int o eight 16- bit blocks and writ t en in hexadecim al not at ion. Hexadecim al uses four bit s for each
charact er ( 1 ~ 10, A ~ F) . Each block’s 16 bit s are t hen represent ed by four hexadecim al
charact ers. For exam ple, FFFF: FFFF: FFFF: FFFF: FC00: 0000: 0000: 0000.
4.1.3 Before You Begin
You need t o know your I nt ernet access set t ings such as encapsulat ion and WAN I P address. Get t his
inform at ion from your I SP.
4.2 The Layer-2 Interface ATM Screen
The VDSL Rout er m ust have a layer- 2 int erface t o allow users t o use t he DSL port t o access t he
I nt ernet . The screen varies depending on t he int erface t ype you select . Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s
web configurat or and click Adva n ce d Se t u p > La ye r 2 I nt e r fa ce > ATM I n t e r fa ce t o m anage
t he ATM layer- 2 int erfaces.
Not e: The ATM and PTM layer- 2 int erfaces cannot work at t he sam e t im e.
Figure 16 Layer- 2 I nt erface: ATM
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 13 Layer- 2 I nt erface: ATM
78
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
The nam e of a configured layer- 2 int erface.
Vpi
This displays t he Virt ual Pat h I dent ifier ( VPI ) .
Vci
This displays t he Virt ual Channel I dent ifier ( VCI ) .
DSL Lat ency
This displays whet her t he ATM int erface uses int erleave delay ( Pa t h 1 ) or fast m ode wit h
no int erleave delay ( Pa t h 0 ) .
Cat egory
This displays t he ATM t raffic class.
Peak Cell Rat e
This displays t he m axim um rat e at which t he sender can send cells.
Sust ainable Cell
Rat e
This displays t he average cell rat e ( long- t erm ) at which t he sender can send cells.
Max Burst Size
This displays t he m axim um num ber of cells t hat can be sent at t he peak rat e.
Link Type
This is t he DSL link t ype of t he ATM layer- 2 int erface.
Conn Mode
This shows t he connect ion m ode of t he layer- 2 int erface.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 13 Layer- 2 I nt erface: ATM ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P QoS
This displays whet her QoS ( Qualit y of Service) is enabled on t he int erface.
MPAAL
Prec/ Alg/ Wght
This displays t he int erface’s default queue precedence, queuing algorit hm , and weight ed
round robin weight .
Rem ove
Select an int erface and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e it . You cannot rem ove a layer2 int erface when a WAN service is associat ed wit h it .
Add
Click t his but t on t o creat e a new ATM layer- 2 int erface.
4.2.1 Layer-2 ATM Interface Configuration
Click t he Add but t on in t he La ye r 2 I nt e r fa ce : ATM screen t o open t he following screen. Use t his
screen t o creat e a new layer- 2 int erface. You can have m ult iple ATM layer- 2 int erfaces using
different VPI and/ or VCI values. The screen varies depending on t he int erface t ype you select .
Figure 17 DSL ATM I nt erface Configurat ion
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
79
Chapter 4 WAN
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 14 Layer- 2 ATM I nt erface Configurat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
ATM PVC
Configurat ion
VPI ( Virt ual Pat h I dent ifier) and VCI ( Virt ual Channel I dent ifier) define a virt ual circuit .
This sect ion is available only when you configure an ATM layer- 2 int erface.
VPI
The valid range for t he VPI is 0 t o 255. Ent er t he VPI assigned t o you.
VCI
The valid range for t he VCI is 32 t o 65535 ( 0 t o 31 is reserved for local m anagem ent of
ATM t raffic) . Ent er t he VCI assigned t o you.
Select DSL Lat ency
Select Pa t h 0 ( Fa st ) t o use no int erleaving and have fast er t ransm ission ( a “ fast
channel” ) . Suit able only for a good line wit h lit t le need for error correct ion.
At t he t im e of writ ing t he VDSL Rout er support s fast m ode only and int erleaved is
reserved for fut ure use.
Select DSL Link
Type
Select EoA ( Et hernet over ATM) t o have an Et hernet header in t he packet , so t hat you
can have m ult iple services/ connect ions over one PVC. You can set each connect ion t o
have it s own MAC address or all connect ions share one MAC address but use different
VLAN I Ds for different services. EoA support s ENET ENCAP ( I PoE) , PPPoE and RFC1483/
2684 bridging encapsulat ion m et hods.
Select PPPoA ( PPP over ATM) t o allow j ust one PPPoA connect ion over a PVC.
Select I PoA ( I P over ATM) t o allow j ust one RFC 1483 rout ing connect ion over a PVC.
Encapsulat ion
Mode
Select t he I SP’s m et hod of m ult iplexing.
•
•
•
•
Service Cat egory
VC/ M UX: I n VC m ult iplexing, each prot ocol is carried on a separat e ATM virt ual
circuit ( VC) . To t ransport m ult iple prot ocols, t he VDSL Rout er needs separat e VCs.
There is a binding bet ween a VC and t he t ype of t he net work prot ocol carried on t he
VC. This reduces payload overhead since t here is no need t o carry prot ocol
inform at ion in each Prot ocol Dat a Unit ( PDU) payload.
LLC/ SN AP- BRI D GI N G: I n LCC encapsulat ion, bridged PDUs are encapsulat ed by
ident ifying t he t ype of t he bridged m edia in t he SNAP header. This is available only
when you select EoA in t he Se le ct D SL Link Type field.
LLC/ EN CAPSULATI ON : More t han one prot ocol can be carried over t he sam e VC.
This is available only when you select PPPoA in t he Se le ct D SL Lin k Type field.
LLC/ SN AP- ROUTI N G: I n LCC encapsulat ion, bridged PDUs are encapsulat ed by
ident ifying t he t ype of t he bridged m edia in t he SNAP header. This is available only
when you select EoA in t he Se le ct D SL Link Type field.
Select UBR W it h ou t PCR or UBR W it h PCR for applicat ions t hat are non- t im e
sensit ive, such as e- m ail.
Select CBR ( Cont inuous Bit Rat e) t o specify fixed ( always- on) bandwidt h for voice or
dat a t raffic.
Select N on Re a lt im e V BR ( non real- t im e Variable Bit Rat e) for connect ions t hat do not
require closely cont rolled delay and delay variat ion.
Select Re a lt im e V BR ( real- t im e Variable Bit Rat e) for applicat ions wit h burst y
connect ions t hat require closely cont rolled delay and delay variat ion.
Peak Cell Rat e
Divide t he DSL line rat e ( bps) by 424 ( t he size of an ATM cell) t o find t he Peak Cell Rat e
( PCR) . This is t he m axim um rat e at which t he sender can send cells. Type t he PCR here.
Sust ainable Cell
Rat e
The Sust ain Cell Rat e ( SCR) set s t he average cell rat e ( long- t erm ) t hat can be
t ransm it t ed. Type t he SCR, w hich m ust be less t han t he PCR. Not e t hat syst em default is
0 cells/ sec.
Maxim um Burst
Size
Maxim um Burst Size ( MBS) refers t o t he m axim um num ber of cells t hat can be sent at
t he peak rat e. Type t he MBS, which is less t han 65535.
This field is not available when you select UBR W it h ou t PCR.
This field is available only when you select N on Re a lt im e VBR or Re a lt im e VBR.
This field is available only when you select N on Re a lt im e VBR or Re a lt im e VBR.
80
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 14 Layer- 2 ATM I nt erface Configurat ion ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Scheduler
Select t he scheduler t o use for queues t hat have t he sam e precedence as t he default
queue. Queuing applies only when a port has m ore t raffic t han it can handle.
W e ight e d Rou n d Robin scheduling services queues of t he sam e priorit y level on a
rot at ing basis based on t heir queue weight . The higher a queue’s weight , t he m ore
service it get s. This queuing m echanism divides any available bandwidt h across t he
different t raffic queues and ret urns t o queues t hat have not yet em pt ied.
W e ight e d Fa ir Qu e u ing guarant ees each queue's m inim um bandw idt h based on it s
queue weight during t raffic congest ion. This queuing m echanism divides any available
bandwidt h across t he different t raffic queues. Weight ed fair queuing handles packet s of
various sizes bet t er t han weight ed round robin queuing does.
Default Queue
Weight
Specify t he VC’s weight for weighed fair queuing. The higher t he weight , t he bigger
port ion of t he bandwidt h t he VC get s.
Default Queue
Precedence
Specify t he VC’s priorit y for weighed fair queuing. The sm aller t he num ber t he higher
t he priorit y.
VC WRR Weight
Specify t he VC’s weight for weight ed round robin queuing. The higher t he weight , t he
bigger port ion of t he bandwidt h t he VC get s.
VC Precedence
Specify t he VC’s priorit y for weight ed round robin queuing. The sm aller t he num ber t he
higher t he priorit y.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen wit hout saving any changes.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes and go back t o t he previous screen.
4.3 The Layer-2 Interface PTM Screen
The VDSL Rout er m ust have a layer- 2 int erface t o allow users t o use t he DSL port t o access t he
I nt ernet . The screen varies depending on t he int erface t ype you select . Log int o t he VDSL Rout er’s
web configurat or and click Adva nce d Se t up > La ye r 2 I nt e r fa ce > PTM I nt e r fa ce t o m anage
t he PTM layer- 2 int erfaces.
Not e: The ATM and PTM layer- 2 int erfaces cannot work at t he sam e t im e.
Figure 18 Layer- 2 I nt erface: PTM
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
81
Chapter 4 WAN
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 15 Layer- 2 I nt erface: PTM
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
The nam e of a configured layer- 2 int erface.
DSL Lat ency
This displays whet her t he ATM int erface uses int erleave delay ( Pa t h 1 ) or fast m ode wit h
no int erleave delay ( Pa t h 0 ) .
PTM Priorit y
This does not apply at t he t im e of writ ing.
Conn Mode
This shows t he connect ion m ode of t he layer- 2 int erface.
I P QoS
This displays whet her QoS ( Qualit y of Service) is enabled on t he int erface.
Rem ove
Select an int erface and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e it . You cannot rem ove a layer2 int erface when a WAN service is associat ed wit h it .
Add
Click t his but t on t o creat e a new ATM layer- 2 int erface.
4.3.1 Layer-2 PTM Interface Configuration
Click t he Add but t on in t he La ye r 2 I nt e r fa ce : PTM screen t o open t he following screen. Use t his
screen t o creat e a new layer- 2 int erface.
Figure 19 DSL PTM I nt erface Configurat ion
82
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 16 Layer- 2 PTM I nt erface Configurat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select DSL Lat ency
Select Pa t h 0 ( Fa st ) t o use no int erleaving and have fast er t ransm ission ( a “ fast
channel” ) . Suit able only for a good line wit h lit t le need for error correct ion.
At t he t im e of writ ing t he VDSL Rout er support s fast m ode only and int erleaved is
reserved for fut ure use.
Scheduler
Select t he scheduler t o use for queues t hat have t he sam e precedence as t he default
queue.
W e ight e d Rou n d Robin scheduling services queues of t he sam e priorit y level on a
rot at ing basis based on t heir queue weight . The higher a queue’s weight , t he m ore
service it get s. This queuing m echanism divides any available bandwidt h across t he
different t raffic queues and ret urns t o queues t hat have not yet em pt ied.
During t raffic congest ion W e igh t e d Fa ir Qu e u in g guarant ees each queue's m inim um
bandwidt h based on it s default queue weight . This queuing m echanism divides any
available bandwidt h across t he different t raffic queues. Weight ed fair queuing applies
only when a port has m ore t raffic t han it can handle.
Default Queue
Weight
Specify t he PTM int erface’s weight for weighed fair queuing. The higher t he weight , t he
bigger port ion of t he bandwidt h t he PTM int erface get s.
Default Queue
Precedence
Specify t he PTM int erface’s priorit y for weighed fair queuing. The sm aller t he num ber
t he higher t he priorit y.
Default Queue
Shaping Rat e
Specify t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e allowed for t raffic on t his queue.
Default Queue
Shaping Burst Size
Specify t he m axim um num ber of cells t hat can be sent at t he default queue shaping
rat e.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen wit hout saving any changes.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes and go back t o t he previous screen.
4.4 The WAN Service Screen
Use t his screen t o change your VDSL Rout er’s WAN set t ings. Click Adva n ce d Se t u p > W AN
Se r vice . The sum m ary t able shows you t he configured WAN services ( connect ions) on t he VDSL
Rout er.
To use NAT, firewall or I GMP proxy in t he VDSL Rout er, you need t o configure a WAN connect ion
wit h PPPoE or I PoE.
Not e: When a layer- 2 int erface is in V LAN M UX M ode , you can configure up t o five WAN
services on t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
83
Chapter 4 WAN
Figure 20 WAN Service
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 17 WAN Service
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
This shows t he nam e of t he int erface used by t his connect ion.
A default nam e ipoa * , pppoa * , a t m * or pt m * indicat es t he DSL port . ppp* indicat es a PPP
connect ion t hrough any one of t he WAN int erfaces.
The num ber aft er t he dot ( .) represent s t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent t hrough
t his connect ion. The num ber aft er t he underscore ( _ ) represent s t he index num ber of
connect ions t hrough t he sam e int erface.
( n u ll) m eans t he ent ry is not valid.
Descript ion
Th is is t h e se r vice n a m e of t h is con n e ct ion .
0 and 3 5 or 0 and 1 are t he default VPI and VCI num bers. The last num ber represent s t he
index num ber of connect ions over t he sam e PVC or t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic
sent t hrough t his connect ion.
( n u ll) m eans t he ent ry is not valid.
Type
This shows t he m et hod of encapsulat ion used by t his connect ion.
Vlan8021p
This indicat es t he 802.1P priorit y level assigned t o t raffic sent t hrough t his connect ion. This
displays N / A when t here is no priorit y level assigned.
VlanMuxI d
This indicat es t he VLAN I D num ber assigned t o t raffic sent t hrough t his connect ion. This
displays N / A when t here is no VLAN I D num ber assigned.
ConnI d
This shows t he index num ber of each connect ion. This displays N / A when t he int erface used
by t he connect ion is in D e fa u lt M ode .
I gm p
This shows whet her I GMP ( I nt ernet Group Mult icast Prot ocol) is act ivat ed or not for t his
connect ion. I GMP is not available when t he connect ion uses t he bridging service.
NAT
This shows whet her NAT is act ivat ed or not for t his int erface. NAT is not available when t he
connect ion uses t he bridging service.
I Pv6
This shows whet her I Pv6 is act ivat ed or not for t his connect ion. I Pv6 is not available when t he
connect ion uses t he bridging service.
Mld
This shows whet her Mult icast List ener Discovery ( MLD) is act ivat ed or not for t his connect ion.
MLD is not available when t he connect ion uses t he bridging service.
Rem ove
Select an int erface and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e it . You cannot rem ove a layer- 2
int erface when a WAN service is associat ed w it h it .
Modify
Click t he Edit icon t o configure t he WAN connect ion.
Click t he Re m ove icon t o delet e t he WAN connect ion.
Add
84
Click Add t o creat e a new connect ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
4.4.1 WAN Connection Configuration
Click t he Edit or Add but t on in t he W AN Se r vice screen t o configure a WAN connect ion.
4.4.1.1 WAN Interface
This screen displays when you add a new WAN connect ion.
Figure 21 WAN Configurat ion: WAN I nt erface
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 18 WAN Configurat ion: WAN I nt erface
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select a layer 2
int erface for t his
service
Select pt m x t o use t he DSL port as t he WAN port and use t he VDSL
t echnology for dat a t ransm ission.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
Select a t m x or ipoa x ( where x st art s from 0 and is t he index num ber of ATM
layer- 2 int erfaces using different VPI and/ or VCI values) t o use t he DSL port as
t he WAN port and use t he ADSL t echnology for dat a t ransm ission.
4.4.1.2 Service Type
I f you set t he DSL link t ype t o PPPoA or I PoA for t he ATM int erface and configure a WAN
connect ion using t he ATM int erface, you only need t o configure t he En t e r Se r vice D e scr ipt ion
field in t his screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
85
Chapter 4 WAN
Figure 22 WAN Configurat ion: Service Type
Figure 23 The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 19 WAN Configurat ion: Service Type
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select WAN
service t ype
Select t he m et hod of encapsulat ion used by your I SP.
Ent er Service
Descript ion
Specify a nam e for t his connect ion or use t he aut om at ically generat ed one.
Rat e Lim it
Ent er t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e in Kbps for t raffic sent t hrough t he WAN connect ion.
Ot herwise, leave t his field blank t o disable t he rat e lim it .
Choices are PPP ove r Et h e r n e t ( PPPoE) , I P ove r Et h e r n e t and Br idgin g.
This field is not available for an ATM connect ion if QoS is disabled in t he DSL ATM I nt erface
Configurat ion.
Tag VLAN I D for
egress packet s
Select t his opt ion t o add t he VLAN t ag ( specified below) t o t he out going t raffic t hrough t his
connect ion.
This field is available when t he layer- 2 int erface is in VLAN M UX m ode.
Ent er 802.1P
Priorit y
I EEE 802.1p defines up t o 8 separat e t raffic t ypes by insert ing a t ag int o a MAC- layer
fram e t hat cont ains bit s t o define class of service.
Type t he I EEE 802.1p priorit y level ( from 0 t o 7) t o add t o t raffic t hrough t his connect ion.
The great er t he num ber, t he higher t he priorit y level.
This field is available when t he layer- 2 int erface is in VLAN M UX m ode.
Ent er 802.1Q
VLAN I D
Type t he VLAN I D num ber ( from 1 t o 4094) for t raffic t hrough t his connect ion.
This field is available when t he PTM int erface is in VLAN M UX m ode.
86
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 19 WAN Configurat ion: Service Type
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Net work Prot ocol
Select ion
Select I Pv4 On ly t o have t he VDSL Rout er use only I Pv4.
Select I Pv4 & I Pv6 ( D u a l St a ck ) t o let t he VDSL Rout er connect t o I Pv4 and I Pv6
net works an choose t he prot ocol for applicat ions according t o t he address t ype. This let s
t he VDSL Rout er use an I Pv6 address when sending t raffic t hrough t his connect ion. You
can only select t his for a WAN service t hat uses t he PPPoE or I PoE encapsulat ion m et hod
over t he ATM or PTM int erface.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
4.4.1.3 WAN IP Address and DNS Server
The screen differs by t he encapsulat ion you select ed in t he previous screen. See Sect ion 4.6 on
page 99 for m ore inform at ion.
PPPoE or PPPoA
This screen displays when you select PPP ove r Et h e r ne t ( PPPoE) in t he W AN Se r vice
Con figu r a t ion screen or set t he DSL link t ype t o PPPoA for t he ATM int erface and configure a
WAN connect ion using t he ATM int erface.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
87
Chapter 4 WAN
Figure 24 WAN Configurat ion: PPPoE
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 20 WAN Configurat ion: PPPoE or PPPoA
88
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PPP Usernam e
Ent er t he user nam e exact ly as your I SP assigned. I f assigned a nam e in t he form
user@dom ain where dom ain ident ifies a service nam e, t hen ent er bot h com ponent s
exact ly as given.
PPP Password
Ent er t he password associat ed wit h t he user nam e above.
PPPoE Service
Nam e
Type t he nam e of your PPPoE service here.
This field is not available for a PPPoA connect ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 20 WAN Configurat ion: PPPoE or PPPoA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Aut hent icat ion
Met hod
The VDSL Rout er support s PAP ( Password Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol) and CHAP ( Challenge
Handshake Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol) . CHAP is m ore secure t han PAP; however, PAP is
readily available on m ore plat form s.
Use t he drop- down list box t o select an aut hent icat ion prot ocol for out going calls.
Opt ions are:
AUTO - Your VDSL Rout er accept s eit her CHAP or PAP when request ed by t his rem ot e
node.
PAP - Your VDSL Rout er accept s PAP only.
CH AP - Your VDSL Rout er accept s CHAP only.
M SCH AP - Your VDSL Rout er accept s MSCHAP only. MS- CHAP is t he Microsoft version
of t he CHAP.
Enable NAT
Select t his check box t o act ivat e NAT on t his connect ion.
Enable Fullcone NAT
This field is available only when you select En a ble N AT. Select t his check box t o
act ivat e full cone NAT on t his connect ion.
Dial on Dem and
Select t his check box t o not keep t he connect ion up all t he t im e. Specify an idle t im eout in t he I n a ct ivit y Tim e ou t field.
I nact ivit y
Tim eout
PPP I P ext ension
Specify an idle t im e- out when you select D ia l on D e m a n d. The default set t ing is 0,
which m eans t he I nt ernet session will not t im eout .
Select t his only if your service provider requires it . PPP I P ext ension ext ends t he service
provider ’s I P subnet t o a single LAN com put er.
•
•
•
•
•
Use St at ic I Pv4
Address
I Pv4 Address
Use St at ic I Pv6
Address
I Pv6 Address
I t let s only one com put er on t he LAN connect t o t he WAN.
The public I P address from t he I SP is forwarded t hrough DHCP t o t he LAN com put er
inst ead of being used on t he WAN PPP int erface.
I t disables NAT and t he firewall.
DHCP t ells t he LAN com put er t o use t he gat eway as t he default gat eway and DNS
server.
The VDSL Rout er bridges I P packet s bet ween t he WAN and LAN port s except
packet s dest ined for t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN I P address.
Select t his opt ion if you have a fixed I Pv4 address assigned by your I SP.
Ent er t he I Pv4 address assigned by your I SP.
Select t his opt ion if you have a fixed I Pv6 address assigned by your I SP.
Ent er t he I Pv6 address assigned by your I SP.
Enable I Pv6
Unnum bered Model
Select t his t o enable I Pv6 processing on t he int erface wit hout assigning an explicit I Pv6
address t o t he int erface.
Launch Dhcp6c for
Address
Assignm ent
Select t his check box t o obt ain an I Pv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
Enable PPP Debug
Mode
Select t his opt ion t o display PPP debugging m essages on t he console.
The I P address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priorit y over t he I P address
aut om at ically generat ed by t he VDSL Rout er using t he I Pv6 prefix from an RA.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
89
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 20 WAN Configurat ion: PPPoE or PPPoA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Bridge PPPoE
Fram es Bet ween
WAN and Local
Port s
Select t his opt ion t o forward PPPoE packet s from t he WAN port t o t he LAN port s and
from t he LAN port s t o t he WAN port .
I n addit ion t o t he VDSL Rout er's built- in PPPoE client , you can select t his t o allow up t o
t en host s on t he LAN t o use PPPoE client soft ware on t heir com put ers t o connect t o t he
I SP via t he VDSL Rout er. Each host can have a separat e account and a public WAN I P
address.
This is an alt ernat ive t o NAT for applicat ion where NAT is not appropriat e.
Clear t his if you do not need t o allow host s on t he LAN t o use PPPoE client soft ware on
t heir com put ers t o connect t o t he I SP.
This field is not available for a PPPoA connect ion.
Enable I GMP
Mult icast Proxy
Select t his check box t o have t he VDSL Rout er act as an I GMP proxy on t his connect ion.
This allows t he VDSL Rout er t o get subscribing inform at ion and m aint ain a j oined
m em ber list for each m ult icast group. I t can reduce m ult icast t raffic significant ly.
Enable MLD
Mult icast Proxy
Select En a ble t o have t he VDSL Rout er act as an MLD proxy on t his connect ion. This
allows t he VDSL Rout er t o get subscript ion inform at ion and m aint ain a j oined m em ber
list for each m ult icast group. I t can reduce m ult icast t raffic significant ly.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
IPoE
This screen displays when you select I P ove r Et h e r ne t in t he W AN Se r vice Con figu r a t ion
screen.
90
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Figure 25 WAN Configurat ion: I PoE
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 21 WAN Configurat ion: I PoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Obt ain an I P
address
aut om at ically
A st at ic I P address is a fixed I P t hat your I SP gives you. A dynam ic I P address is not
fixed; t he I SP assigns you a different one each t im e you connect t o t he I nt ernet . Select
t his if you have a dynam ic I P address.
Opt ion 60 Vendor
ID
DHCP Opt ion 60 ident ifies t he vendor and funct ionalit y of t he VDSL Rout er in DHCP
request s t hat t he VDSL Rout er sends t o a DHCP server when get t ing a WAN I P address.
Ent er t he Vendor Class I dent ifier ( Opt ion 60) , such as t he t ype of t he hardware or
firm ware.
Opt ion 61 I AI D
DHCP Opt ion 61 ident ifies t he VDSL Rout er in DHCP request s t he VDSL Rout er sends t o
a DHCP server when get t ing a WAN I P address. Ent er t he I dent it y Associat ion I dent ifier
( I AI D) of t he VDSL Rout er. For exam ple, t he WAN connect ion index num ber.
Opt ion 61 DUI D
Ent er t he DHCP Unique I dent ifier ( DUI D) of t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
91
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 21 WAN Configurat ion: I PoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Opt ion 125
Enable t his t o add vendor specific inform at ion t o DHCP request s t hat t he VDSL Rout er
sends t o a DHCP server when get t ing a WAN I P address.
Use t he following
St at ic I P address
Select t his if you have a st at ic I P address.
WAN I P Address
Ent er t he st at ic I P address provided by your I SP.
WAN Subnet
Mask
Ent er t he subnet m ask provided by your I SP.
WAN gat eway I P
Address
Ent er t he gat eway I P address provided by your I SP.
Obt ain an I Pv6
address
aut om at ically
Dhcpv6 Address
Assignm ent
Select t his opt ion t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he I Pv6 prefix from t he connect ed
rout er ’s Rout er Advert isem ent ( RA) t o generat e an I Pv6 address.
Select t his check box t o obt ain an I Pv6 address from a DHCPv6 server.
The I P address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priorit y over t he I P address
aut om at ically generat ed by t he VDSL Rout er using t he I Pv6 prefix from an RA.
Use t he following
St at ic I Pv6 address
Select t his opt ion if you have a fixed I Pv6 address assigned by your I SP.
WAN I Pv6
Address/ Prefix
Lengt h
Ent er t he st at ic I Pv6 address and bit num ber of t he I Pv6 subnet m ask provided by your
I SP.
WAN I Pv6
Subnet Prefix
Lengt h
Ent er t he bit num ber of t he I Pv6 subnet m ask provided by your I SP.
WAN Next- Hop
I Pv6 Address
Ent er t he gat eway I Pv6 address provided by your I SP.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
IPoA
This screen displays only when you set t he DSL link t ype t o I PoA for t he ATM int erface and
configure a WAN connect ion using t he ATM int erface.
Figure 26 WAN Configurat ion: I PoA
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 22 WAN Configurat ion: I PoA
92
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WAN I P Address
Ent er t he st at ic I P address provided by your I SP.
WAN Subnet Mask
Ent er t he subnet m ask provided by your I SP.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 22 WAN Configurat ion: I PoA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
4.4.1.4 NAT, IGMP Multicast and Firewall Activation
The screen is available only when you select I P ove r Et he r ne t in t he W AN Se r vice
Con figu r a t ion screen or set t he DSL link t ype t o I PoA for t he ATM int erface and configure a WAN
connect ion using t he ATM int erface.
Figure 27 WAN Configurat ion: NAT, I GMP Mult icast and Firewall Act ivat ion: I PoE/ I PoA
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 23 WAN Configurat ion: NAT, I GMP Mult icast and Firewall Act ivat ion: I PoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable NAT
Select t his check box t o act ivat e NAT on t his connect ion.
Enable Fullcone NAT
Select t his check box t o act ivat e full cone NAT on t his connect ion.
This field is available only when you select En a ble N AT.
Enable I GMP
Mult icast Proxy
Select t his check box t o have t he VDSL Rout er act as an I GMP proxy on t his
connect ion. This allows t he VDSL Rout er t o get subscribing inform at ion and
m aint ain a j oined m em ber list for each m ult icast group. I t can reduce m ult icast
t raffic significant ly.
Enable MLD
Mult icast Proxy
Select En a ble t o have t he VDSL Rout er act as an MLD proxy on t his
connect ion. This allows t he VDSL Rout er t o get subscript ion inform at ion and
m aint ain a j oined m em ber list for each m ult icast group. I t can reduce
m ult icast t raffic significant ly.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
4.4.1.5 Default Gateway
The screen is not available when you select Br idgin g in t he W AN Se r vice Configur a t ion screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
93
Chapter 4 WAN
Figure 28 WAN Configurat ion: Default Gat eway: PPPoE, PPPoA, I PoE or I PoA
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 24 WAN Configurat ion: Default Gat eway: PPPoE or I PoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select ed Default
Gat eway I nt erfaces
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which you want t o forward t he t raffic.
Available Rout ed
WAN I nt erfaces
These are t he WAN int erfaces you can select from .
Select ed WAN
I nt erface
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which t o forward I Pv6 t raffic.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
You can select m ult iple WAN int erfaces for t he device t o t ry. The VDSL Rout er t ries t he
WAN int erfaces in t he order list ed and uses only t he default gat eway of t he first WAN
int erface t hat connect s; t here is no backup WAN funct ion. To change t he priorit y order
rem ove t hem all and add t hem back in again.
4.4.1.6 DNS Server
The screen is not available when you select Br idgin g in t he W AN Se r vice Configur a t ion screen.
Not e: I f you configure only one I PoA or I PoE connect ion using t he ATM int erface on t he
VDSL Rout er, you m ust ent er t he st at ic DNS ser ver addr ess.
94
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Figure 29 WAN Configurat ion: DNS Server: PPPoE, PPPoA, I PoE or I PoA
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 25 WAN Configurat ion: DNS Server: PPPoE or I PoE
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select DNS Server
I nt erface from
available WAN
int erfaces
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he DNS server addresses from one of t he
VDSL Rout er’s WAN int erfaces.
Select ed DNS
Server
I nt erfaces
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which t o get DNS server addresses.
You can select m ult iple WAN int erfaces for t he device t o t ry. The VDSL Rout er t ries t he
WAN int erfaces in t he order list ed and uses only t he DNS server inform at ion of t he first
WAN int erface t hat connect s; t here is no backup WAN funct ion. To change t he priorit y
order rem ove t hem all and add t hem back in again.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
95
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 25 WAN Configurat ion: DNS Server: PPPoE or I PoE
LABEL
Available WAN
I nt erfaces
Use t he following
St at ic DNS I P
address
DESCRIPTION
These are t he WAN int erfaces you can select from .
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he DNS server addresses you configure
m anually.
Prim ary DNS
server
Ent er t he first DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Secondary DNS
server
Ent er t he second DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Obt ain I Pv6 DNS
info from a WAN
int erface
WAN I nt erface
select ed
Use t he following
St at ic I Pv6 DNS
address
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he I Pv6 DNS server addresses from t he I SP
aut om at ically.
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which you want t o obt ain t he I Pv6 DNS relat ed
inform at ion.
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he I Pv6 DNS server addresses you configure
m anually.
Prim ary I Pv6
DNS server
Ent er t he first I Pv6 DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Secondary I Pv6
DNS server
Ent er t he second I Pv6 DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Next
Click t his but t on t o cont inue.
4.4.1.7 Configuration Summary
This read- only screen shows t he current WAN connect ion set t ings.
Figure 30 WAN Configurat ion: Configurat ion Sum m ary
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 26 WAN Configurat ion: Configurat ion Sum m ary
96
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Connect ion Type
This is t he encapsulat ion m et hod used by t his connect ion.
NAT
This shows whet her NAT is act ive or not for t his connect ion.
Full Cone NAT
This shows whet her full cone NAT is act ive or not for t his connect ion.
I GMP Mult icast
This shows whet her I GMP m ult icast ing is act ive or not for t his connect ion.
Qualit y Of Service
This shows whet her QoS is act ive or not for t his connect ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 26 WAN Configurat ion: Configurat ion Sum m ary
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Back
Click t his but t on t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
4.5 The 3G Backup Screen
Use t his screen t o configure your 3G set t ings. Click N e t w or k > W AN > 3 G Ba ck u p. See Sect ion
2.2 on page 20 for t he support ed 3G USB dongles.
Not e: The act ual dat a rat e you obt ain varies depending t he 3G card you use, t he signal
st rengt h t o t he service provider ’s base st at ion, and so on.
I f t he signal st rengt h of a 3G net work is t oo low, t he 3G card m ay swit ch t o an available 2.5G or
2.75G net work. Refer t o Sect ion 4.6 on page 99 for a com parison bet ween 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G and 3G
wireless t echnologies.
Figure 31 3G Backup
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
97
Chapter 4 WAN
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 27 3G Backup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable 3G Backup
Select t his opt ion t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he 3G connect ion as your WAN
or a backup when t he wired WAN connect ion fails.
Card Descript ion
This field displays t he m anufact urer and m odel nam e of your 3G card if you
insert ed one in t he VDSL Rout er. Ot herwise, it displays N / A.
3G St at us
This field displays:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N oD e vice when no 3G card is insert ed,
D isa ble d when t he 3G WAN is not act ivat ed,
Up when t he 3G connect ion is up,
D ow n when t he 3G connect ion is down,
N oRe spon se when t here is no response from t he insert ed 3G card,
I n va lidPI N if t he PI N code you ent ered in t he W AN > 3 G Ba ck u p screen
is not t he right one for t he 3G card you insert ed,
N e e dPUK if you ent er t he PI N ( Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber) code
incorrect ly for t hree t im es and t he SI M card is blocked by your I SP,
D ia lFa il when t he VDSL Rout er fails t o dial up a 3G connect ion.
or I n va lidSI M w hen t he SI M card is dam aged or not insert ed.
Usernam e
Type t he user nam e ( of up t o 70 ASCI I print able charact ers) given t o you by
your service provider.
Password
Type t he password ( of up t o 70 ASCI I print able charact ers) associat ed wit h t he
user nam e above.
Dial st ring
Ent er t he phone num ber ( dial st ring) used t o dial up a connect ion t o your
service provider ’s base st at ion. Your I SP should provide t he phone num ber.
For exam ple, * 99# is t he dial st ring t o est ablish a GPRS or 3G connect ion in
Taiwan.
APN
Ent er t he APN ( Access Point Nam e) provided by your service provider.
Connect ions wit h different APNs m ay provide different services ( such as
I nt ernet access or MMS ( Mult i- Media Messaging Service) ) and charge m et hod.
You can ent er up t o 31 ASCI I print able charact ers. Spaces are allowed.
Connect ion
Select N a ile d Up if you do not want t he connect ion t o t im e out .
Select on D e m a n d if you do not want t he connect ion up all t he t im e and
specify an idle t im e- out in t he M a x I dle Tim e out field.
Max I dle
Tim eout
This value specifies t he t im e in m inut es t hat elapses before t he VDSL Rout er
aut om at ically disconnect s from t he I SP.
0 m eans t he I nt ernet session will not t im eout .
Obt ain an I P
Address
Aut om at ically
Select t his opt ion I f your I SP did not assign you a fixed I P address.
Use t he following
st at ic I P address
Select t his opt ion I f t he I SP assigned a fixed I P address.
I P Address
Obt ain DNS info
dynam ically
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he DNS server addresses from t he I SP
aut om at ically.
Use t he following
st at ic DNS I P
address
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he DNS server addresses you
configure m anually.
Prim ary DNS
server
98
Ent er your WAN I P address in t his field if you select ed Use t h e follow ing
st a t ic I P a ddr e ss.
Ent er t he first DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Table 27 3G Backup ( cont inued)
LABEL
Secondary DNS
server
DESCRIPTION
Ent er t he second DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o ret urn t o t he previous configurat ion.
4.6 Technical Reference
The following sect ion cont ains addit ional t echnical inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er feat ures
described in t his chapt er.
Encapsulation
Be sure t o use t he encapsulat ion m et hod required by your I SP. The VDSL Rout er can work in bridge
m ode or rout ing m ode. When t he VDSL Rout er is in rout ing m ode, it support s t he following
m et hods.
IP over Ethernet
I P over Et hernet ( I PoE) is an alt ernat ive t o PPPoE. I P packet s are being delivered across an
Et hernet net work, wit hout using PPP encapsulat ion. They are rout ed bet ween t he Et hernet int erface
and t he WAN int erface and t hen form at t ed so t hat t hey can be underst ood in a bridged
environm ent . For inst ance, it encapsulat es rout ed Et hernet fram es int o bridged Et hernet cells.
PPP over ATM (PPPoA)
PPPoA st ands for Point t o Point Prot ocol over ATM Adapt at ion Layer 5 ( AAL5) . A PPPoA connect ion
funct ions like a dial- up I nt ernet connect ion. The VDSL Rout er encapsulat es t he PPP session based
on RFC1483 and sends it t hrough an ATM PVC ( Perm anent Virt ual Circuit ) t o t he I nt ernet Service
Provider ’s ( I SP) DSLAM ( digit al access m ult iplexer) . Please refer t o RFC 2364 for m ore inform at ion
on PPPoA. Refer t o RFC 1661 for m ore inform at ion on PPP.
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)
Point- t o- Point Prot ocol over Et hernet ( PPPoE) provides access cont rol and billing funct ionalit y in a
m anner sim ilar t o dial- up services using PPP. PPPoE is an I ETF st andard ( RFC 2516) specifying how
a personal com put er ( PC) int eract s wit h a broadband m odem ( DSL, cable, wireless, et c.)
connect ion.
For t he service provider, PPPoE offers an access and aut hent icat ion m et hod t hat works wit h exist ing
access cont rol syst em s ( for exam ple RADI US) .
One of t he benefit s of PPPoE is t he abilit y t o let you access one of m ult iple net work services, a
funct ion known as dynam ic service select ion. This enables t he service provider t o easily creat e and
offer new I P services for individuals.
Operat ionally, PPPoE saves significant effort for bot h you and t he I SP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configurat ion of t he broadband m odem at t he cust om er sit e.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
99
Chapter 4 WAN
By im plem ent ing PPPoE direct ly on t he VDSL Rout er ( rat her t han individual com put ers) , t he
com put ers on t he LAN do not need PPPoE soft ware inst alled, since t he VDSL Rout er does t hat part
of t he t ask. Furt herm ore, wit h NAT, all of t he LANs’ com put ers will have access.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes t wo m et hods for Mult iprot ocol Encapsulat ion over ATM Adapt at ion Layer 5
( AAL5) . The first m et hod allows m ult iplexing of m ult iple prot ocols over a single ATM virt ual circuit
( LLC- based m ult iplexing) and t he second m et hod assum es t hat each prot ocol is carried over a
separat e ATM virt ual circuit ( VC- based m ult iplexing) . Please refer t o RFC 1483 for m ore det ailed
inform at ion.
Multiplexing
There are t wo convent ions t o ident ify what prot ocols t he virt ual circuit ( VC) is carrying. Be sure t o
use t he m ult iplexing m et hod required by your I SP.
VC- based Mult iplexing
I n t his case, by prior m ut ual agreem ent , each prot ocol is assigned t o a specific virt ual circuit ; for
exam ple, VC1 carries I P, et c. VC- based m ult iplexing m ay be dom inant in environm ent s where
dynam ic creat ion of large num bers of ATM VCs is fast and econom ical.
LLC- based Mult iplexing
I n t his case one VC carries m ult iple prot ocols wit h prot ocol ident ifying inform at ion being cont ained
in each packet header. Despit e t he ext ra bandwidt h and processing overhead, t his m et hod m ay be
advant ageous if it is not pract ical t o have a separat e VC for each carried prot ocol, for exam ple, if
charging heavily depends on t he num ber of sim ult aneous VCs.
Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreem ent bet ween t he carrier and t he subscriber t o regulat e t he average rat e
and fluct uat ions of dat a t ransm ission over an ATM net work. This agreem ent helps elim inat e
congest ion, which is im port ant for t ransm ission of real t im e dat a such as audio and video
connect ions.
Peak Cell Rat e ( PCR) is t he m axim um rat e at which t he sender can send cells. This param et er m ay
be lower ( but not higher) t han t he m axim um line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 byt es ( 424 bit s) , so a
m axim um speed of 832Kbps gives a m axim um PCR of 1962 cells/ sec. This rat e is not guarant eed
because it is dependent on t he line speed.
Sust ained Cell Rat e ( SCR) is t he m ean cell rat e of each burst y t raffic source. I t specifies t he
m axim um average rat e at which cells can be sent over t he virt ual connect ion. SCR m ay not be
great er t han t he PCR.
Maxim um Burst Size ( MBS) is t he m axim um num ber of cells t hat can be sent at t he PCR. Aft er MBS
is reached, cell rat es fall below SCR unt il cell rat e averages t o t he SCR again. At t his t im e, m ore
cells ( up t o t he MBS) can be sent at t he PCR again.
I f t he PCR, SCR or MBS is set t o t he default of " 0" , t he syst em will assign a m axim um value t hat
correlat es t o your upst ream line rat e.
100
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
The following figure illust rat es t he relat ionship bet ween PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 32 Exam ple of Traffic Shaping
ATM Traffic Classes
These are t he basic ATM t raffic classes defined by t he ATM Forum Traffic Managem ent 4.0
Specificat ion.
Const ant Bit Rat e ( CBR)
Const ant Bit Rat e ( CBR) provides fixed bandwidt h t hat is always available even if no dat a is being
sent . CBR t raffic is generally t im e- sensit ive ( doesn't t olerat e delay) . CBR is used for connect ions
t hat cont inuously require a specific am ount of bandwidt h. A PCR is specified and if t raffic exceeds
t his rat e, cells m ay be dropped. Exam ples of connect ions t hat need CBR would be high- resolut ion
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rat e ( VBR)
The Variable Bit Rat e ( VBR) ATM t raffic class is used wit h burst y connect ions. Connect ions t hat use
t he Variable Bit Rat e ( VBR) t raffic class can be grouped int o real t im e ( VBR- RT) or non- real t im e
( VBR- nRT) connect ions.
The VBR- RT ( real- t im e Variable Bit Rat e) t ype is used wit h burst y connect ions t hat require closely
cont rolled delay and delay variat ion. I t also provides a fixed am ount of bandwidt h ( a PCR is
specified) but is only available when dat a is being sent . An exam ple of an VBR- RT connect ion would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real- t im e dat a t ransfers and t he bandwidt h
requirem ent varies in proport ion t o t he video im age's changing dynam ics.
The VBR- nRT ( non real- t im e Variable Bit Rat e) t ype is used wit h burst y connect ions t hat do not
require closely cont rolled delay and delay variat ion. I t is com m only used for " burst y" t raffic t ypical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define t he burst levels, SCR defines t he m inim um level. An exam ple of an
VBR- nRT connect ion would be non- t im e sensit ive dat a file t ransfers.
Unspecified Bit Rat e ( UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rat e ( UBR) ATM t raffic class is for burst y dat a t ransfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarant ee any bandwidt h and only delivers t raffic when t he net work has spare bandwidt h. An
exam ple applicat ion is background file t ransfer.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
101
Chapter 4 WAN
IP Address Assignment
A st at ic I P is a fixed I P t hat your I SP gives you. A dynam ic I P is not fixed; t he I SP assigns you a
different one each t im e. The Single User Account feat ure can be enabled or disabled if you have
eit her a dynam ic or st at ic I P. However t he encapsulat ion m et hod assigned influences your choices
for I P address and default gat eway.
Introduction to VLANs
A Virt ual Local Area Net work ( VLAN) allows a physical net work t o be part it ioned int o m ult iple logical
net works. Devices on a logical net work belong t o one group. A device can belong t o m ore t han one
group. Wit h VLAN, a device cannot direct ly t alk t o or hear from devices t hat are not in t he sam e
group( s) ; t he t raffic m ust first go t hrough a rout er.
I n Mult i-Tenant Unit ( MTU) applicat ions, VLAN is vit al in providing isolat ion and securit y am ong t he
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevent s one subscriber from accessing t he net work
resources of anot her on t he sam e LAN, t hus a user will not see t he print ers and hard disks of
anot her user in t he sam e building.
VLAN also increases net work perform ance by lim it ing broadcast s t o a sm aller and m ore
m anageable logical broadcast dom ain. I n t radit ional swit ched environm ent s, all broadcast packet s
go t o each and every individual port . Wit h VLAN, all broadcast s are confined t o a specific broadcast
dom ain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A t agged VLAN uses an explicit t ag ( VLAN I D) in t he MAC header t o ident ify t he VLAN m em bership
of a fram e across bridges - t hey are not confined t o t he swit ch on which t hey were creat ed. The
VLANs can be creat ed st at ically by hand or dynam ically t hrough GVRP. The VLAN I D associat es a
fram e wit h a specific VLAN and provides t he inform at ion t hat swit ches need t o process t he fram e
across t he net work. A t agged fram e is four byt es longer t han an unt agged fram e and cont ains t wo
byt es of TPI D ( Tag Prot ocol I dent ifier) , residing wit hin t he t ype/ lengt h field of t he Et hernet fram e)
and t wo byt es of TCI ( Tag Cont rol I nform at ion) , st art s aft er t he source address field of t he Et hernet
fram e) .
The CFI ( Canonical Form at I ndicat or) is a single- bit flag, always set t o zero for Et hernet swit ches. I f
a fram e received at an Et hernet port has a CFI set t o 1, t hen t hat fram e should not be forwarded as
it is t o an unt agged port . The rem aining t welve bit s define t he VLAN I D, giving a possible m axim um
num ber of 4,096 VLANs. Not e t hat user priorit y and VLAN I D are independent of each ot her. A
fram e wit h VI D ( VLAN I dent ifier) of null ( 0) is called a priorit y fram e, m eaning t hat only t he priorit y
level is significant and t he default VI D of t he ingress port is given as t he VI D of t he fram e. Of t he
4096 possible VI Ds, a VI D of 0 is used t o ident ify priorit y fram es and value 4095 ( FFF) is reserved,
so t he m axim um possible VLAN configurat ions are 4,094.
102
TPI D
User Priorit y
CFI
VLAN I D
2 Byt es
3 Bit s
1 Bit
12 Bit s
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 4 WAN
Multicast
I P packet s are t ransm it t ed in eit her one of t wo ways - Unicast ( 1 sender - 1 recipient ) or Broadcast
( 1 sender - everybody on t he net work) . Mult icast delivers I P packet s t o a group of host s on t he
net work - not everybody and not j ust 1.
I nt ernet Group Mult icast Prot ocol ( I GMP) is a net work- layer prot ocol used t o est ablish m em bership
in a Mult icast group - it is not used t o carry user dat a. I GMP version 2 ( RFC 2236) is an
im provem ent over version 1 ( RFC 1112) but I GMP version 1 is st ill in wide use. I f you would like t o
read m ore det ailed inform at ion about int eroperabilit y bet ween I GMP version 2 and version 1, please
see sect ions 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D I P address is used t o ident ify host groups and can be
in t he range 224.0.0.0 t o 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned t o any group
and is used by I P m ult icast com put ers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query m essages and is
assigned t o t he perm anent group of all I P host s ( including gat eways) . All host s m ust j oin t he
224.0.0.1 group in order t o part icipat e in I GMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned t o t he m ult icast
rout ers group.
At st art up, t he VDSL Rout er queries all direct ly connect ed net works t o gat her group m em bership.
Aft er t hat , t he VDSL Rout er periodically updat es t his inform at ion.
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Dom ain Nam e Syst em ( DNS) t o m ap a dom ain nam e t o it s corresponding I P address and vice
versa, for inst ance, t he I P address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is ext rem ely
im port ant because wit hout it , you m ust know t he I P address of a com put er before you can access
it .
The VDSL Rout er can get t he DNS server addresses in t he following ways.
The I SP t ells you t he DNS server addresses, usually in t he form of an inform at ion sheet , when you
sign up. I f your I SP gives you DNS server addresses, m anually ent er t hem in t he DNS server fields.
I f your I SP dynam ically assigns t he DNS server I P addresses ( along wit h t he VDSL Rout er’s WAN I P
address) , set t he DNS server fields t o get t he DNS server address from t he I SP.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128- bit I Pv6 address is writ t en as eight 16- bit hexadecim al blocks separat ed by colons ( : ) . This
is an exam ple I Pv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
I Pv6 addresses can be abbreviat ed in t wo ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be om it t ed. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be writ t en as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any num ber of consecut ive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an I Pv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
writ t en as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Sim ilar t o an I Pv4 subnet m ask, I Pv6 uses an address prefix t o represent t he net work address. An
I Pv6 prefix lengt h specifies how m any m ost significant bit s ( st art from t he left ) in t he address
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
103
Chapter 4 WAN
com pose t he net work address. The prefix lengt h is writ t en as “ / x” where x is a num ber. For
exam ple,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
m eans t hat t he first 32 bit s ( 2001:db8) is t he subnet prefix.
104
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
LAN Setup
5.1 Overview
A Local Area Net work ( LAN) is a shared com m unicat ion syst em t o which m any net working devices
are connect ed. I t is usually locat ed in one im m ediat e area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use t he LAN screens t o help you configure a LAN DHCP server and m anage I P addresses.
LAN
DSL
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he LAN Se t u p screen t o set t he LAN I P address, subnet m ask, and DHCP set t ings of your
VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 5.2 on page 106) .
• Use t he St a t ic D H CP screen t o assign I P addresses on t he LAN t o specific individual com put ers
based on t heir MAC Addresses ( Sect ion 5.2.1 on page 108) .
• Use t he I Pv6 Au t ocon fig screen t o set t he Local Area Net work int erface I Pv6 set t ings (Sect ion
5.3 on page 109) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
105
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
5.1.2 What You Need To Know
IP Address
I P addresses ident ify individual devices on a net work. Every net working device ( including
com put ers, servers, rout ers, print ers, et c.) needs an I P address t o com m unicat e across t he
net work. These net working devices are also known as host s.
Subnet Mask
Subnet m asks det erm ine t he m axim um num ber of possible host s on a net work. You can also use
subnet m asks t o divide one net work int o m ult iple sub- net works.
DHCP
A DHCP ( Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol) server can assign your VDSL Rout er an I P address,
subnet m ask, DNS and ot her rout ing inform at ion when it 's t urned on.
DNS
DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) is for m apping a dom ain nam e t o it s corresponding I P address and
vice versa. The DNS server is ext rem ely im port ant because wit hout it , you m ust know t he I P
address of a net working device before you can access it .
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)
When an I Pv6 host sends a Rout er Solicit at ion ( RS) request t o discover t he available rout ers,
RADVD wit h Rout er Advert isem ent ( RA) m essages in response t o t he request . I t specifies t he
m inim um and m axim um int ervals of RA broadcast s. RA m essages cont aining t he address prefix.
I Pv6 host s can be generat ed wit h t he I Pv6 prefix an I Pv6 address.
Finding Out More
See Sect ion 5.4 on page 111 for t echnical background inform at ion on LANs.
5.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out t he MAC addresses of your net work devices if you int end t o add t hem t o t he DHCP Client
List screen.
5.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t u p > LAN t o open t he LAN Se t up screen. Use t his screen t o set t he Local Area
Net work int erface set t ings.
106
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
Figure 33 LAN Set up
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 28 LAN Set up
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Address
Ent er t he LAN I P address t o assign t o your VDSL Rout er in dot t ed decim al not at ion,
for exam ple, 192.168.1.1 ( fact ory default ) .
Subnet Mask
Type t he subnet m ask of your net work in dot t ed decim al not at ion, for exam ple
255.255.255.0 ( fact ory default ) . Your VDSL Rout er aut om at ically com put es t he
subnet m ask based on t he I P Address you ent er, so do not change t his field unless
you are inst ruct ed t o do so.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
107
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
Table 28 LAN Set up ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable I GMP Snooping
Enable I GMP snooping t o have t he VDSL Rout er passively learn m em berships in
m ult icast groups.
Select St a n da r d M ode t o have t he VDSL Rout er forward m ult icast packet s t o a port
t hat j oins t he m ult icast group and broadcast unknown m ult icast packet s from t he
WAN t o all LAN port s.
Select Block in g M ode t o have t he VDSL Rout er block all unknown m ult icast
packet s from t he WAN.
Disable DHCP Server
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er not provide DHCP services. Users m ust
configure LAN devices wit h m anual net work set t ings if you do not have anot her
DHCP server on t he net work.
Enable DHCP Server
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er serve as t he DHCP server for t he net work t o
assign I P addresses and provide subnet m ask, gat eway, and DNS server inform at ion
t o LAN devices.
St art I P Address
This field specifies t he first of t he cont iguous addresses in t he I P address pool.
End I P Address
This field specifies t he last of t he cont iguous addresses in t he I P address pool.
DHCP Server Lease
Tim e
Specify for how m any hours t o assign an I P address t o a LAN device before m aking
it available for reassignm ent t o ot her syst em s.
St at ic I P Lease List
Use t his t able t o assign I P addresses on t he LAN t o specific com put ers based on
t heir MAC Addresses.
MAC Address
The MAC ( Media Access Cont rol) of a LAN device t o which t he ent ry’s I P address is
assigned.
I P Address
This field displays t he I P address reserved for t he LAN device wit h t he ent ry’s MAC.
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove En t r ie s but t on t o delet e t hem .
Add Ent ries
Click t his but t on t o creat e a new st at ic I P lease ent ry.
Obt ain DNS info from
WAN
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he Dom ain Nam e Syst em ( DNS) server
addresses from t he VDSL Rout er’s WAN int erface.
Use St at ic DNS I P
address
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he DNS server addresses you configure
m anually.
First DNS Server,
Second DNS Server
Configure t he second I P
Address and Subnet
Mask for LAN int erface
Ent er t he first and second DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) server I P address t he VDSL
Rout er passes t o t he DHCP client s.
Select t he check box t o use I P alias t o configure anot her LAN net work for t he VDSL
Rout er.
I P alias part it ions a physical net work int o different logical net works over t he sam e
Et hernet int erface. The VDSL Rout er support s m ult iple logical LAN int erfaces via it s
physical Et hernet int erface wit h t he VDSL Rout er it self as t he gat eway for t he LAN
net work. You can also configure firewall rules t o cont rol access t o t he LAN's logical
net work ( subnet ) .
I P Address
Ent er t he second LAN I P address of your VDSL Rout er in dot t ed decim al not at ion.
Subnet Mask
Type t he subnet m ask of your net work in dot t ed decim al not at ion, for exam ple
255.255.255.0 ( fact ory default ) .
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
5.2.1 Add DHCP Static IP Lease Screen
Click Add En t r ie s in t he LAN Se t u p screen t o display t he following screen.
108
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
Figure 34 St at ic DHCP: Add/ Edit
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 29 St at ic DHCP: Add/ Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Address
Ent er t he MAC address of a com put er on your LAN.
Every Et hernet device has a unique MAC ( Media Access Cont rol) address. The MAC
address is assigned at t he fact ory and consist s of six pairs of hexadecim al charact ers, for
exam ple, 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02.
I P Address
Ent er t he I P address t hat you want t o assign t o t he com put er on your LAN wit h t he MAC
address t hat you will also specify.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes and go back t o t he previous screen.
5.3 The IPv6 LAN Auto Configuration Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > LAN > I Pv6 Au t oconfig t o open t he I Pv6 LAN Aut o Con figur a t ion
screen. Use t his screen t o set t he Local Area Net work int erface I Pv6 set t ings.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
109
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
Figure 35 I Pv6 LAN Aut o Configurat ion
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 30 I Pv6 LAN Aut o Configurat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface Address
To use a st at ic I Pv6 address, ent er t he I Pv6 address prefix and prefix lengt h t hat t he
VDSL Rout er uses for t he LAN I Pv6 address.
The I Pv6 prefix lengt h specifies how m any m ost significant bit s ( st art ing from t he
left ) in t he address com pose t he net work address. This field displays t he bit num ber
of t he I Pv6 subnet m ask.
Enable DHCPv6 Server
St at eless
110
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er act as a DHCPv6 server and pass I Pv6
addresses, DNS server and dom ain nam e inform at ion t o DHCPv6 client s.
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use I Pv6 st at eless aut oconfigurat ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
Table 30 I Pv6 LAN Aut o Configurat ion ( cont inued)
LABEL
St at eful
DESCRIPTION
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use I Pv6 st at eful aut oconfigurat ion.
St a r t in t e r fa ce I D : specify t he first I Pv6 address in t he pool of addresses t hat can
be assigned t o DHCPv6 client s.
En d in t e r fa ce I D : specify t he last I Pv6 address in t he pool of addresses t hat can
be assigned t o DHCPv6 client s.
Le a se d Tim e ( h ou r ) : Specify for how m any hours t o assign an I Pv6 address t o a
DHCPv6 client before m aking it available for reassignm ent t o ot her syst em s.
Assign DNS servers
by DHCPv6
Enable RADVD
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er pass DNS server inform at ion t o DHCPv6 client s.
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er send rout er advert isem ent m essages t o t he
LAN host s.
Rout er advert isem ent is a response t o a rout er solicit at ion or a periodical m ult icast
advert isem ent from a rout er t o advert ise it s presence and ot her param et ers, such
as I Pv6 prefix and DNS inform at ion. Rout er solicit at ion is a request from a host t o
locat e a rout er t hat can act as t he default rout er and forward packet s.
Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with
other networks if you disable this feature.
Enable ULA Prefix
Advert isem ent
Select t his t o send Unique Local I Pv6 Unicast Addresses ( ULA) advert isem ent
m essages t o t he LAN host s.
Random ly Generat e
Select t his t o aut om at ically creat e a LAN I Pv6 address prefix.
St at ically Configure
Select t his t o send a fixed LAN I Pv6 address prefix.
Pr e fix : ent er
I Pv6 address.
from t he left )
bit num ber of
t he I Pv6 prefix and lengt h t he VDSL Rout er uses t o generat e t he LAN
The prefix lengt h specifies how m any m ost significant bit s ( st art ing
in t he address com pose t he net work address. This field displays t he
t he I Pv6 subnet m ask.
Pr e fe r r e d Life Tim e ( h our ) : ent er t he preferred lifet im e for t he prefix.
Va lid Life Tim e ( h ou r ) : ent er t he valid lifet im e for t he prefix.
Enable MLD Snooping
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er check Mult icast List ener Discovery ( MLD)
packet s t o learn t he m ult icast group m em bership. This helps reduce m ult icast
t raffic.
St andard Mode
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er forward m ult icast packet s t o a port t hat j oins
t he m ult icast group and broadcast unknown m ult icast packet s from t he WAN t o all
LAN port s.
Blocking Mode
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er block all unknown m ult icast packet s from t he
WAN.
Save/ Apply
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
5.4 Technical Reference
This sect ion provides som e t echnical background inform at ion about t he t opics covered in t his
chapt er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
111
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
5.4.1 LANs, WANs and the VDSL Router
The act ual physical connect ion det erm ines whet her t he VDSL Rout er port s are LAN or WAN port s.
There are t wo separat e I P net works, one inside t he LAN net work and t he ot her out side t he WAN
net work as shown next .
Figure 36 LAN and WAN I P Addresses
LAN
WAN
5.4.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP ( Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual client s t o
obt ain TCP/ I P configurat ion at st art- up from a server. You can configure t he VDSL Rout er as a DHCP
server or disable it . When configured as a server, t he VDSL Rout er provides t he TCP/ I P
configurat ion for t he client s. I f you t urn DHCP service off, you m ust have anot her DHCP server on
your LAN, or else t he com put er m ust be m anually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The VDSL Rout er is pre- configured wit h a pool of I P addresses for t he DHCP client s ( DHCP Pool) .
See t he product specificat ions in t he appendices. Do not assign st at ic I P addresses from t he DHCP
pool t o your LAN com put ers.
5.4.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) m aps a dom ain nam e t o it s corresponding I P address and vice versa.
The DNS server is ext rem ely im port ant because wit hout it , you m ust know t he I P address of a
com put er before you can access it . The DNS server addresses you ent er when you set up DHCP are
passed t o t he client m achines along wit h t he assigned I P address and subnet m ask.
There are t wo ways t hat an I SP dissem inat es t he DNS server addresses.
• The I SP t ells you t he DNS server addresses, usually in t he form of an inform at ion sheet , when
you sign up. I f your I SP gives you DNS server addresses, ent er t hem in t he D N S Se r ve r fields in
t he D H CP Se t up screen.
112
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
• Som e I SPs choose t o dissem inat e t he DNS server addresses using t he DNS server ext ensions of
I PCP ( I P Cont rol Prot ocol) aft er t he connect ion is up. I f your I SP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are t he DNS servers are conveyed t hrough I PCP negot iat ion. The VDSL Rout er
support s t he I PCP DNS server ext ensions t hrough t he DNS proxy feat ure.
Please not e t hat DNS proxy works only when t he I SP uses t he I PCP DNS server ext ensions. I t
does not m ean you can leave t he DNS servers out of t he DHCP set up under all circum st ances. I f
your I SP gives you explicit DNS servers, m ake sure t hat you ent er t heir I P addresses in t he
D H CP Se t up screen.
5.4.4 LAN TCP/IP
The VDSL Rout er has built- in DHCP server capabilit y t hat assigns I P addresses and DNS servers t o
syst em s t hat support DHCP client capabilit y.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Sim ilar t o t he way houses on a st reet share a com m on st reet nam e, so t oo do com put ers on a LAN
share one com m on net work num ber.
Where you obt ain your net work num ber depends on your part icular sit uat ion. I f t he I SP or your
net work adm inist rat or assigns you a block of regist ered I P addresses, follow t heir inst ruct ions in
select ing t he I P addresses and t he subnet m ask.
I f t he I SP did not explicit ly give you an I P net work num ber, t hen m ost likely you have a single user
account and t he I SP will assign you a dynam ic I P address when t he connect ion is est ablished. I f t his
is t he case, it is recom m ended t hat you select a net work num ber from 192.168.0.0 t o
192.168.255.0 and you m ust enable t he Net work Address Translat ion ( NAT) feat ure of t he VDSL
Rout er. The I nt ernet Assigned Num ber Aut horit y ( I ANA) reserved t his block of addresses
specifically for privat e use; please do not use any ot her num ber unless you are t old ot herwise. Let 's
say you select 192.168.1.0 as t he net work num ber; which covers 254 individual addresses, from
192.168.1.1 t o 192.168.1.254 ( zero and 255 are reserved) . I n ot her words, t he first t hree num bers
specify t he net work num ber while t he last num ber ident ifies an individual com put er on t hat
net work.
Once you have decided on t he net work num ber, pick an I P address t hat is easy t o rem em ber, for
inst ance, 192.168.1.1, for your VDSL Rout er, but m ake sure t hat no ot her device on your net work
is using t hat I P address.
The subnet m ask specifies t he net work num ber port ion of an I P address. Your VDSL Rout er will
com put e t he subnet m ask aut om at ically based on t he I P address t hat you ent ered. You don't need
t o change t he subnet m ask com put ed by t he VDSL Rout er unless you are inst ruct ed t o do
ot herwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every m achine on t he I nt ernet m ust have a unique address. I f your net works are isolat ed from t he
I nt ernet , for exam ple, only bet ween your t wo branch offices, you can assign any I P addresses t o
t he host s wit hout problem s. However, t he I nt ernet Assigned Num bers Aut horit y ( I ANA) has
reserved t he following t hree blocks of I P addresses specifically for privat e net works:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
113
Chapter 5 LAN Setup
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obt ain your I P address from t he I ANA, from an I SP or it can be assigned from a privat e
net work. I f you belong t o a sm all organizat ion and your I nt ernet access is t hrough an I SP, t he I SP
can provide you wit h t he I nt ernet addresses for your local net works. On t he ot her hand, if you are
part of a m uch larger organizat ion, you should consult your net work adm inist rat or for t he
appropriat e I P addresses.
Not e: Regardless of your part icular sit uat ion, do not creat e an arbit rary I P address;
always follow t he guidelines above. For m ore inform at ion on addr ess assignm ent ,
please refer t o RFC 1597, “Address Allocat ion for Privat e I nt ernet s” and RFC 1466,
“ Guidelines for Managem ent of I P Address Space”.
114
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Network Address Translation (NAT)
6.1 Overview
This chapt er discusses how t o configure NAT on t he VDSL Rout er.
Net work Address Translat ion ( NAT, RFC 1631) is t he t ranslat ion of t he I P address of a host in a
packet , for exam ple, t he source address of an out going packet , used wit hin one net work t o a
different I P address known wit hin anot her net work.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he Vir t ua l Se r ve r s screen t o forward incom ing service request s t o t he server( s) on your
local net work ( Sect ion 6.3 on page 115) .
• Use t he D M Z H ost screen t o configure a default server ( Sect ion 6.4 on page 118) .
6.2 What You Need to Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough t his chapt er.
NAT
I n t he sim plest form , NAT changes t he source I P address in a packet received from a subscriber
( t he inside local address) t o anot her ( t he inside global address) before forwarding t he packet t o t he
WAN side. When t he response com es back, NAT t ranslat es t he dest inat ion address ( t he inside
global address) back t o t he inside local address before forwarding it t o t he original inside host .
Virtual Servers
A virt ual server set is a list of inside ( behind NAT on t he LAN) servers, for exam ple, web or FTP, t hat
you can m ake visible t o t he out side world even t hough NAT m akes your whole inside net work
appear as a single com put er t o t he out side world.
6.3 The Virtual Servers Screen
Click Adva nce d Se t up > N AT t o open t he Vir t ua l Se r ve r s screen. Use t his screen t o m anage t he
list of virt ual server rules.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
115
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Not e: Many resident ial broadband I SP account s do not allow you t o run any server
processes ( such as a Web or FTP server) from your locat ion. Your I SP m ay
periodically check for servers and m ay suspend your account if it discovers any
act ive services at your locat ion. I f you ar e unsure, refer t o your I SP.
Figure 37 NAT Virt ual Servers
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 31 NAT Virt ual Servers
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add
Click t his but t on t o creat e a new ent ry.
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Server Nam e
This field displays t he nam e of t he service used by t he packet s for t his virt ual server.
Ext ernal Port
St art
This is t he first ext ernal port num ber t hat ident ifies a service.
Ext ernal Port
End
This is t he last ext ernal port num ber t hat ident ifies a service.
Prot ocol
This show whet her t he virt ual server applies t o TCP t raffic, UDP t raffic, or bot h.
I nt ernal Port
St art
This is t he first int ernal port num ber t hat ident ifies a service.
I nt ernal Port End
This is t he last int ernal port num ber t hat ident ifies a service.
Server I P
Address
This field displays t he inside I P address of t he server.
WAN I nt erface
This field displays t he WAN int erface t hrough which t he service is forwarded.
6.3.1 The Virtual Servers Add Screen
This screen let s you creat e or edit a virt ual server rule. Click Add in t he Vir t ua l Se r ve r s screen t o
open t he following screen.
You m ay ent er a single port num ber or a range of port num bers t o be forwarded, and t he local I P
address of t he desired server. The port num ber ident ifies a service; for exam ple, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. I n som e cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support m ore t han one service ( for exam ple bot h FTP and web service) , it m ight be bet t er t o
specify a range of port num bers. You can allocat e a server I P address t hat corresponds t o a port or
a range of port s.
116
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Figure 38 Virt ual Servers Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 32 Virt ual Servers Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Use I nt erface
Select a WAN int erface for which you want t o configure a virt ual server rules.
Service Nam e
Select a Service: use t he drop- down list t o select a service.
Cust om Service: t ype a nam e t o specify a different service.
Server I P
Address
Ent er t he inside I P address of t he LAN device t o which t he virt ual server forwards t raffic.
Ext ernal Port
St art
Ent er t he original dest inat ion port for t he packet s.
To forward only one port , ent er t he port num ber again in t he Ex t e r n a l En d Por t field.
To forward a series of port s, ent er t he st art port num ber here and t he end port num ber in
t he Ex t e r n a l En d Por t field.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
117
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 32 Virt ual Servers Add ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Ext ernal Port
End
Ent er t he last port of t he original dest inat ion port range.
To forward only one port , ent er t he port num ber in t he Ex t e r n a l St a r t Por t field above
and t hen ent er it again in t his field.
To forward a series of port s, ent er t he last port num ber in a series t hat begins wit h t he port
num ber in t he Ex t e r n a l St a r t Por t field above.
Prot ocol
Select t he prot ocol support ed by t his virt ual server. Choices are TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UD P.
I nt ernal Port
St art
Ent er t he port num ber here t o which you want t he VDSL Rout er t o t ranslat e t he incom ing
port . For a range of port s, ent er t he first num ber of t he range t o which you want t he
incom ing port s t ranslat ed.
I nt ernal Port End
Ent er t he last port of t he t ranslat ed port range.
Back
Click Ba ck t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l t o begin configuring t his screen afresh.
6.4 The DMZ Host Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > N AT > D M Z H ost t o open t he D M Z H ost screen. Use t his screen t o
specify t he I P address of a default server t o receive packet s from port s not specified in t he Vir t ua l
Se r ve r s screen.
Figure 39 DMZ Host
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 33 DMZ Host
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DMZ Host I P
Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he default server which receives packet s from port s t hat are not
specified in t he Vir t u a l Se r ve r s screen.
Note: If you do not assign a default server, the VDSL Router discards all packets received
for ports not specified in the virtual server configuration.
Save/ Apply
118
Click t his t o save your changes back t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)
6.5 Technical Reference
The following sect ion cont ains addit ional t echnical inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er feat ures
described in t his chapt er.
Virtual Server: Services and Port Numbers
The m ost oft en used port num bers are shown in t he following t able. Please refer t o RFC 1700 for
furt her inform at ion about port num bers. Please also refer t o t he Support ing CD for m ore exam ples
and det ails on port forwarding and NAT.
Table 34 Services and Port Num bers
SERVICES
PORT NUMBER
ECHO
FTP ( File Transfer Prot ocol)
21
SMTP ( Sim ple Mail Transfer Prot ocol)
25
DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em )
53
Finger
79
HTTP ( Hyper Text Transfer prot ocol or WWW, Web)
80
POP3 ( Post Office Prot ocol)
110
NNTP ( Net work News Transport Prot ocol)
119
SNMP ( Sim ple Net work Managem ent Prot ocol)
161
SNMP t rap
162
PPTP ( Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol)
1723
Virtual Server Example
Let 's say you want t o assign port s 21- 25 t o one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in t he exam ple) ,
port 80 t o anot her ( B in t he exam ple) and assign a default server I P address of 192.168.1.35 t o a
t hird ( C in t he exam ple) . You assign t he LAN I P addresses and t he I SP assigns t he WAN I P address.
The NAT net work appears as a single host on t he I nt ernet .
Figure 40 Mult iple Servers Behind NAT Exam ple
A=192.168.1.33
192.168.1.1
B=192.168.1.34
IP address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.35
D=192.168.1.36
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
119
Chapter 6 Network Address Translation (NAT)
120
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Firewall
7.1 Overview
This chapt er shows you how t o enable and configure t he VDSL Rout er firewall set t ings.
The VDSL Rout er firewall is a packet filt ering firewall and rest rict s access based on t he source/
dest inat ion com put er net work address of a packet and t he t ype of applicat ion.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he Ge n e r a l screen ( Sect ion 7.2 on page 121) t o enable firewall on t he VDSL Rout er, and
set t he default act ion t hat t he firewall t akes on packet s t hat do not m at ch any of t he firewall
rules.
• Use t he Rule s screen ( Sect ion 7.3 on page 123) t o view t he configured firewall rules and add,
edit or rem ove a firewall rule.
7.2 The Firewall General Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t u p > Fir e w a ll t o display t he following screen. Act ivat e t he firewall by select ing
t he Act ive Fir e w a ll check box .
Figure 41 Firewall General
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
121
Chapter 7 Firewall
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 35 Firewall General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Act ive Firewall
Select t his check box t o act ivat e t he firewall. The VDSL Rout er perform s access cont rol and
prot ect s against Denial of Service ( DoS) at t acks when t he firewall is act ivat ed.
No.
This displays t he index num ber of t he default firewall policy.
Act ive
This field displays whet her a policy is t urned on or not . Select t he check box t o enable t he
policy. Clear t he check box t o disable t he policy.
Nam e
This displays t he nam e of t he policy.
I nt erface
This displays t he LAN or WAN int erface( s) t o which t his policy is applied.
Direct ion
This displays t he direct ion of t ravel of packet s ( I n and Ou t ) .
Default Act ion
This displays t he default act ion t hat t he firewall is t o t ake on packet s t hat are t raveling in t he
select ed direct ion and do not m at ch any of t he firewall rules.
Firewall rules are grouped based on t he direct ion of t ravel of packet s t o which t hey apply.
D r op: t he VDSL Rout er silent ly discards t he packet s wit hout sending a TCP reset packet or an
I CMP dest inat ion- unreachable m essage t o t he sender.
Pe r m it : t he VDSL Rout er allows t he passage of t he packet s.
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Edit
Click t he Edit but t on t o go t o t he screen where you can edit t he rule.
Add
Click Add t o creat e a new policy.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he VDSL Rout er.
7.2.1 Default Policy Configuration
I n t he Fir e w a ll Ge n e r a l screen, click Add or click an ent ry’s Edit icon t o configure a firewall policy.
Figure 42 Firewall General: Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 36 Firewall General: Add
122
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Act ive
Select t his check box t o enable t he rule.
Nam e
Ent er a descript ive nam e using print able English keyboard charact ers.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Firewall
Table 36 Firewall General: Add ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
Select All t o apply t he policy t o all int erfaces on t he VDSL Rout er or select t he specific LAN or
WAN int erface t o which t his policy applies.
Direct ion
Specify t he direct ion of t ravel of packet s ( in com in g or ou t goin g) in t his policy.
Default
Act ion
Specify whet her t he firewall silent ly discards packet s ( D r op) or allows t he passage of packet s
( Pe r m it ) .
Back
Click Ba ck t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings and exit t his screen.
7.3 The Firewall Rules Screen
Not e: The ordering of your r ules is very im port ant as rules are applied in t urn.
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > Fir e w a ll > Ru le s t o display t he following screen. This screen list s t he
configured incom ing or out going firewall rules. Not e t he order in which t he rules are list ed.
Not e: The firewall rules t hat you configure here t ake priorit y over t he general firewall
act ion set t ings in t he Ge n e r a l screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
123
Chapter 7 Firewall
Figure 43 Firewall Rules
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 37 Firewall Rules
124
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I ncom ing/
Out going Rules
The following fields sum m arize t he rules you have creat ed t hat apply t o t raffic t raveling in
t he select ed packet direct ion.
No.
This is your firewall rule num ber. The ordering of your rules is im port ant as rules are applied
in t urn.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Firewall
Table 37 Firewall Rules ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Act ive
This field displays whet her a firewall rule is t urned on or not . Select t he check box t o enable
t he rule. Clear t he check box t o disable t he rule.
Nam e
This displays t he nam e of t he rule.
I nt erface
This displays t he LAN or WAN int erface( s) t o which t his rule is applied.
Filt er Crit eria
This displays t he filt ering crit eria, such as t he source or dest inat ion I P addresses and subnet
m ask t o which t his rule applies.
Act ion
This displays whet her t he firewall silent ly discards packet s ( D r op) , discards packet s and
sends an I CMP m essage t o t he sender ( Re j e ct ) or allows t he passage of packet s ( Pe r m it ) .
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Edit
Click t he Edit but t on t o go t o t he screen where you can edit t he rule.
Add
Click Add t o creat e a new rule.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes back t o t he VDSL Rout er.
7.3.1 Firewall Rules Configuration
I n t he Fir e w a ll Rule s screen, click Add or click a rule’s Edit but t on t o display t his screen and refer
t o t he following t able for inform at ion on t he labels.
Figure 44 Firewall Rules: Add
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
125
Chapter 7 Firewall
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 38 Firewall Rules: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Act ive
Select t his check box t o enable t he rule.
Rule Nam e
Ent er a descript ive nam e of up t o 16 print able English keyboard charact ers, including
spaces.
To add a firewall rule, you need t o configure at least one of t he following fields ( except
t he I nt e r fa ce field) .
126
I nt erface
Select an int erface on t he VDSL Rout er t o which t his rule applies.
Direct ion
Select a direct ion of t ravel of packet s for which you want t o configure t he firewall rule.
Prot ocol
Select t he I P prot ocol ( TCP, UD P or I CM P) and ent er t he prot ocol ( service t ype)
num ber in t he port field.
Source I P Address
Ent er t he source I P address in dot t ed decim al not at ion.
Source Subnet
Mask
Ent er t he source subnet m ask.
Source Port
Ent er t he single port num ber or t he range of port num bers of t he source.
Dest inat ion I P
Address
Ent er t he dest inat ion I P address in dot t ed decim al not at ion.
Dest inat ion Subnet
Mask
Ent er t he dest inat ion subnet m ask.
Dest inat ion Port
Ent er t he single port num ber or t he range of port num bers of t he dest inat ion.
Act ion
Use t he drop- down list box t o select whet her t o discard ( D r op) , deny and send an I CMP
m essage t o t he sender of ( Re j e ct ) or allow t he passage of ( Pe r m it ) packet s t hat m at ch
t his rule.
Rej ect Type
I f you select Re j e ct , specify t he t ype of I CMP m essage t o send t o t he sender.
Back
Click Ba ck t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your cust om ized set t ings and exit t his screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Quality of Service (QoS)
8.1 Overview
Qualit y of Service ( QoS) refers t o bot h a net work’s abilit y t o deliver dat a wit h m inim um delay, and
t he net working m et hods used t o cont rol t he use of bandwidt h. Wit hout QoS, all t raffic dat a is
equally likely t o be dropped when t he net work is congest ed. This can cause a reduct ion in net work
perform ance and m ake t he net work inadequat e for t im e- crit ical applicat ion such as video- ondem and.
Configure QoS on t he VDSL Rout er t o group and priorit ize applicat ion t raffic and fine- t une net work
perform ance. Set t ing up QoS involves t hese st eps:
Configure classifiers t o sort t raffic int o different flows.
Assign priorit y and define act ions t o be perform ed for a classified t raffic flow.
The VDSL Rout er assigns each packet a priorit y and t hen queues t he packet accordingly. Packet s
assigned a high priorit y are processed m ore quickly t han t hose wit h low priorit y if t here is
congest ion, allowing t im e- sensit ive applicat ions t o flow m ore sm oot hly. Tim e- sensit ive applicat ions
include bot h t hose t hat require a low level of lat ency ( delay) and a low level of j it t er ( variat ions in
delay) such as Voice over I P ( VoI P) or I nt ernet gam ing, and t hose for which j it t er alone is a problem
such as I nt ernet radio or st ream ing video.
This chapt er cont ains inform at ion about configuring QoS and edit ing classifiers.
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The QoS screen let s you enable or disable QoS and set t he default DSCP m ark ( Sect ion 8.3 on
page 129) .
• The QoS Que ue Se t up screen let s you configure QoS queue assignm ent ( Sect ion 8.4 on page
129) .
• The QoS Cla ssifica t ion Se t u p screen let s you add, edit or delet e QoS classifiers ( Sect ion 8.5 on
page 132) .
8.2 What You Need to Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough t his chapt er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
127
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used t o priorit ize source- t o- dest inat ion t raffic flows. All packet s in t he sam e flow are given
t he sam e priorit y. CoS ( class of service) is a way of m anaging t raffic in a net work by grouping
sim ilar t ypes of t raffic t oget her and t reat ing each t ype as a class. You can use CoS t o give different
priorit ies t o different packet t ypes.
CoS t echnologies include I EEE 802.1p layer 2 t agging and DiffServ ( Different iat ed Services or DS) .
I EEE 802.1p t agging m akes use of t hree bit s in t he packet header, while DiffServ is a new prot ocol
and defines a new DS field, which replaces t he eight- bit ToS ( Type of Service) field in t he I P header.
Tagging and Marking
I n a QoS class, you can configure whet her t o add or change t he DSCP ( DiffServ Code Point ) value,
I EEE 802.1p priorit y level and VLAN I D num ber in a m at ched packet . When t he packet passes
t hrough a com pat ible net work, t he net working device, such as a backbone swit ch, can provide
specific t reat m ent or service based on t he t ag or m arker.
Traffic Shaping
Burst y t raffic m ay cause net work congest ion. Traffic shaping regulat es packet s t o be t ransm it t ed
wit h a pre- configured dat a t ransm ission rat e using buffers ( or queues) . Your VDSL Rout er uses t he
Token Bucket algorit hm t o allow a cert ain am ount of large burst s while keeping a lim it at t he
average rat e.
Traffic Rat e
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic Rat e
Tim e
Tim e
( Aft er Traffic Shaping)
( Before Traffic Shaping)
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is t he lim it ing of t he input or out put t ransm ission rat e of a class of t raffic on t he
basis of user- defined crit eria. Traffic policing m et hods m easure t raffic flows against user- defined
crit eria and ident ify it as eit her conform ing, exceeding or violat ing t he crit eria.
Tim e
( Before Traffic Policing)
128
Traffic Rat e
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic Rat e
Tim e
( Aft er Traffic Policing)
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
8.3 The QoS Screen
Click Adva nce d Se t up > QoS t o open t he screen shown next . Use t his screen t o enable or disable
QoS and set t he default DSCP m ark for out going packet s t hat do not m at ch any classificat ion rules.
Figure 45 QoS
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 39 QoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
QoS
Select t he Ena ble check box t o t urn on QoS t o im prove your net work perform ance.
Select Default
DSCP Mark
Set t he default DSCP ( DiffServ Code Point ) value for out going packet s t hat do not m at ch
any classificat ion rules.
Apply/ Save
Click t his t o save your changes.
8.4 The QoS Queue Setup Screen
Click Adva nce d Se t up > QoS > QoS Que u e t o open t he screen shown next . Use t his screen t o
configure QoS queue assignm ent .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
129
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
Figure 46 QoS Queue Set up
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 40 QoS Queue Set up
130
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Nam e
This shows t he descript ive nam e of t his queue.
Key
This is t he queue’s index num ber.
St at us
This field displays whet her t he queue is act ive or not . A yellow bulb signifies t hat t his queue
is act ive. A gray bulb signifies t hat t his queue is not act ive.
I nt erface
This shows t he nam e of t he VDSL Rout er’s int erface t hrough which t raffic in t his queue
passes.
Qid
This shows t he priorit y of t his queue for t he int erface.
Prec/ Alg/ Wght
This displays t he queue’s default precedence, queue m anagem ent algorit hm , and weight ed
round robin weight .
DSL Lat ency
This displays whet her t he ATM int erface uses int erleave delay ( Pa t h 1 ) or fast m ode wit h no
int erleave delay ( Pa t h 0 ) .
PTM Priorit y
This displays t he queue’s PTM priorit y ( H igh or Low ) . This has no effect at t he t im e of
writ ing.
Shaping Rat e
This displays t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e for t raffic in t his queue.
Burst Size
This displays t he m axim um num ber of cells t he queue can send at t he shaping rat e.
Enable
Select an ent ry’s En a ble opt ion and click t he En a ble but t on t o t urn it on.
Rem ove
Select an ent ry’s Re m ove opt ion and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e it .
Add
Click t his but t on t o creat e a new queue ent ry.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
8.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click t he QoS Que ue Se t up screen’s Add but t on t o configure a new queue.
Figure 47 QoS Queue Set up: Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 41 QoS Queue Set up: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Nam e
Ent er t he descript ive nam e of t his queue.
Enable
Enable or disable t his queue.
I nt erface
Select t he int erface t o which t his queue is applied.
Queue
Precedence
Select t he precedence level ( from 1 t o 8) of t his queue. The sm aller t he num ber, t he higher
t he priorit y level. Traffic assigned t o higher priorit y queues get s t hrough fast er while t raffic
in lower priorit y queues is dropped if t he net work is congest ed.
The precedence list shows t he scheduler algorit hm for each precedence level. The scheduler
algorit hm depends on t he int erface. Et hernet int erfaces use st rict priorit y ( SP) . ATM and
PTM int erfaces use t he scheduler algorit hm configured for t he int erface ( weight ed round
robin or weight ed fair queuing) .
The VDSL Rout er uses t he algorit hm t o service queues wit h t he sam e precedence.
The VDSL Rout er uses st rict priorit y t o service queues wit h different precedences.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
131
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 41 QoS Queue Set up: Add ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Queue Weight
This displays for ATM and PTM int erface queues. Select t he weight of t his queue.
I f t w o queues have t he sam e precedence, t he VDSL Rout er divides t he bandwidt h across t he
queues according t o t heir weight s. Queues wit h larger weight s get m ore bandwidt h t han
queues wit h sm aller weight s.
Default Queue
Weight
This displays for ATM and PTM int erface queues. Specify t he VC’s weight for weighed fair
queuing. The higher t he weight , t he bigger port ion of t he bandwidt h t he VC get s.
Shaping Rat e
This displays for PTM int erface queues. Set t he m axim um t ransm ission rat e for t raffic in t his
queue.
Shaping Burst
Size
This displays for PTM int erface queues. Set t he m axim um num ber of cells t he queue can
send at t he shaping rat e.
PTM Priorit y
This displays for PTM int erface queues. Set t he queue t o low or high priorit y. This has no
effect at t he t im e of writ ing.
DSL Lat ency
This displays for ATM and PTM int erface queues. Select Pa t h 0 ( Fa st ) t o use no int erleaving
and have fast er t ransm ission ( a “ fast channel” ) . Suit able only for a good line wit h lit t le need
for error correct ion.
At t he t im e of writ ing t he VDSL Rout er support s fast m ode only and int erleaved is reserved
for fut ure use.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
8.5 The QoS Classification Setup Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t u p > QoS > QoS Cla ssifica t ion t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen
t o m anage QoS classifiers. A classifier groups t raffic int o dat a flows according t o specific crit eria
such as t he source address, dest inat ion address, source port num ber, dest inat ion port num ber or
incom ing int erface. For exam ple, you can configure a classifier t o select t raffic from t he sam e
prot ocol port ( such as Telnet ) t o form a flow.
You can give different priorit ies t o t raffic t hat t he VDSL Rout er forwards out t hrough t he WAN
int erface. Give high priorit y t o voice and video t o m ake t hem run m ore sm oot hly. Sim ilarly, give low
priorit y t o m any large file downloads so t hat t hey do not reduce t he qualit y of ot her applicat ions.
Figure 48 QoS Classificat ion Set up
132
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 42 QoS Classificat ion Set up
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Class Nam e
This displays t he nam e of t he classifier rule.
Order
This displays t he rule’s place in t he list of classifier rules. The VDSL Rout er checks t raffic
against classifiers in order unt il it m at ches one.
CLASSI FI CATI ON
CRI TERI A
These fields show t he crit eria specified in t he classifier rule. For exam ple t he int erface
from which t raffic of t his class com es and t he source MAC address of t raffic t hat
m at ches t his classifier.
Class I nt f
This displays t he ingress int erface t o which t he classifier applies.
Et her Type
This displays t he t ype of Et hernet fram es t o which t he classifier applies.
SrcMAC/ Mask
This displays t he source MAC and net work m ask of t raffic t o which t he classifier applies.
Dst MAC/ Mask
This displays t he dest inat ion MAC and net work m ask of t raffic t o which t he classifier
applies.
SrcI P/ PrefixLengt h
This displays t he source I P address and prefix lengt h of t raffic t o which t he classifier
applies.
Dst I P/ PrefixLengt h
This displays t he dest inat ion I P address and prefix lengt h of t raffic t o which t he classifier
applies.
Prot o
This displays t he prot ocol of t raffic t o which t he classifier applies.
SrcPort
This displays t he source port of t raffic t o which t he classifier applies.
Dst Port
This displays t he dest inat ion port of t raffic t o which t he classifier applies.
DSCP Check
This displays t he DSCP m ark of t raffic t o which t he classifier applies.
802.1P Check
This displays t he I EEE 802.1p priorit y level of t raffic t o which t he classifier applies.
CLASSI FI CATI ON
RESULTS
These fields show t he changes t he classifier rule applies t o m at ching t raffic.
Queue Key
This displays t he num ber of t he queue t o which t he VDSL Rout er adds t raffic t hat
m at ches t his classifier.
DSCP Mark
This displays t he DSCP m ark t he VDSL Rout er adds t o t raffic t hat m at ches t his classifier.
802.1P Mark
This displays t he I EEE 802.1p priorit y level t he VDSL Rout er assigns t o t raffic t hat
m at ches t his classifier.
Forward I nft
This displays t he int erface t hrough which t he VDSL Rout er forwards t raffic t hat m at ches
t his classifier. Un ch a n ge m eans t he VDSL Rout er forwards t raffic of t his class according
t o t he default rout ing t able.
Rat e Lim it ( kbps)
This displays t he rat e lim it ( if any) t hat t he VDSL Rout er applies t o t raffic t hat m at ches
t his classifier.
Enable
Select an ent ry’s En a ble opt ion and click t he En a ble but t on t o t urn it on.
Rem ove
Select an ent ry’s Re m ove opt ion and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e it .
Add
Click t his but t on t o creat e a new classifier rule.
8.5.1 Add QoS Classification Rule
Click Add ne w Cla ssifie r in t he Cla ss Se t up screen or t he Edit icon next t o a classifier t o open
t he following screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
133
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
Figure 49 QoS Classificat ion Set up: Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 43 QoS Classificat ion Set up: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Traffic Class
Nam e
Ent er a descript ive nam e of up t o 15 print able English keyboard charact ers, not including
spaces.
Rule Order
Select an exist ing num ber for where you want t o put t his classifier t o m ove t he classifier t o
t he num ber you select ed aft er clicking Apply.
Select La st t o put t his rule in t he back of t he classifier list .
134
Rule St at us
Enable or disable t his classifier.
Specify
Classificat ion
Crit eria
Configure t hese fields t o ident ify t he t raffic t o which t he class applies. The fields available
vary depending on t he select ed int erface and Et her t ype. Leave a field blank t o not apply
t hat crit erion.
Class I nt erface
Select t he ingress int erface t o which t he classifier applies.
Et her Type
Select t he predefined applicat ion ( I P, ARP, I Pv6, PPPoE discovery, PPPoE session, 8865,
8866, or I EEE 802.1q) t o which t he classifier applies. The list of t ypes available t o choose
from varies depending on t he select ed int erface.
Source MAC
Address
Ent er a MAC address t o apply t he classifier t o packet s from t hat MAC address.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 43 QoS Classificat ion Set up: Add ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Source MAC
Mask
Type t he m ask for t he specified MAC address t o det erm ine which bit s a packet ’s MAC
address should m at ch.
Ent er “ f” for each bit of t he specified source MAC address t hat t he t raffic’s MAC address
should m at ch. Ent er “ 0” for t he bit ( s) of t he m at ched t raffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecim al charact er( s) . For exam ple, if you set t he MAC address t o
00: 13: 49: 00: 00: 00 and t he m ask t o ff: ff: ff: 00: 00: 00, a packet wit h a MAC address of
00: 13: 49: 12: 34: 56 m at ches t his crit eria.
Dest inat ion
MAC Address
Ent er a MAC address t o apply t he classifier t o packet s dest ined for t hat MAC address.
Dest inat ion
MAC Mask
Type t he m ask for t he specified MAC address t o det erm ine which bit s a packet ’s MAC
address should m at ch.
Ent er “ f” for each bit of t he specified source MAC address t hat t he t raffic’s MAC address
should m at ch. Ent er “ 0” for t he bit ( s) of t he m at ched t raffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecim al charact er( s) . For exam ple, if you set t he MAC address t o
00: 13: 49: 00: 00: 00 and t he m ask t o ff: ff: ff: 00: 00: 00, a packet wit h a MAC address of
00: 13: 49: 12: 34: 56 m at ches t his crit eria.
Source I P
Address[ / Mask]
Select t his and ent er an I P address t o apply t he classifier t o packet s from t hat I P address.
You can also include a source subnet m ask.
Vendor Class I D
( DHCP Opt ion
60)
Select t his and ent er t he Vendor Class I dent ifier ( Opt ion 60) of t he m at ched t raffic, such as
t he t ype of t he hardware or firm ware.
User Class I D
DHCP opt ion 77
Select t his and ent er a st ring t hat ident ifies t he user ’s cat egory or applicat ion t ype in t he
m at ched DHCP packet s.
Dest inat ion I P
Address[ / Mask]
Ent er an I P address t o apply t he classifier t o packet s dest ined for t hat I P address. You can
also include a dest inat ion subnet m ask.
Different iat ed
Service Code
Point ( DSCP)
Check
Select a DSCP m ark of t raffic t o which t o apply t he classifier.
802.1p Priorit y
Check
This field is available only when you set t he Et h e r Type field t o 8 0 2 1 Q.
Specify
Classificat ion
Result s
Configure t hese fields t o change t raffic t hat m at ches t he classifier. The fields available vary
depending on t he select ed int erface, Et her t ype, and som et im es on t he select ed class
queue. Leave a field blank t o not apply t hat t ype of change.
Specify Class
Queue
Select t he queue t o which t o add t raffic t hat m at ches t his classifier.
Forward To
I nt erface
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which t o forward t raffic of t his class. Select Unch a n ge t o
forward t raffic of t his class according t o t he default rout ing t able.
Mark
Different iat ed
Service Code
Point ( DSCP) :
Select t he DSCP m ark t o add t o t raffic t hat m at ches t his classifier. Use Au t o m arking t o
aut om at ically apply a DSCP m ark according t o t he t ype of t raffic. Use de fa u lt t o leave t he
DSCP m ark unchanged.
Prot ocol
Select a service t ype ( TCP, UD P, I CM P or I GM P) of t raffic t o which t o apply t he classifier.
Mark 802.1p
priorit y
Select t he I EEE 802.1p priorit y level t o assign t o t raffic t hat m at ches t his classifier.
Set Rat e Lim it
Set t he rat e lim it t o apply t o t raffic t hat m at ches t his classifier.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Select t he I EEE 802.1p priorit y level ( bet ween 0 and 7) of t raffic t o which t o apply t he
classifier. " 0" is t he lowest priorit y level and " 7" is t he highest .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
135
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
8.6 Technical Reference
The following sect ion cont ains addit ional t echnical inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er feat ures
described in t his chapt er.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The I EEE 802.1Q st andard defines an explicit VLAN t ag in t he MAC header t o ident ify t he VLAN
m em bership of a fram e across bridges. A VLAN t ag includes t he 12- bit VLAN I D and 3- bit user
priorit y. The VLAN I D associat es a fram e wit h a specific VLAN and provides t he inform at ion t hat
devices need t o process t he fram e across t he net work.
I EEE 802.1p specifies t he user priorit y field and defines up t o eight separat e t raffic t ypes. The
following t able describes t he t raffic t ypes defined in t he I EEE 802.1d st andard ( which incorporat es
t he 802.1p) .
Table 44 I EEE 802.1p Priorit y Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7
Typically used for net work cont rol t raffic such as rout er configurat ion m essages.
Level 6
Typically used for voice t raffic t hat is especially sensit ive t o j it t er ( j it t er is t he
variat ions in delay) .
Level 5
Typically used for video t hat consum es high bandwidt h and is sensit ive t o j it t er.
Level 4
Typically used for cont rolled load, lat ency- sensit ive t raffic such as SNA ( Syst em s
Net work Archit ect ure) t ransact ions.
Level 3
Typically used for “ excellent effort ” or bet t er t han best effort and would include
im port ant business t raffic t hat can t olerat e som e delay.
Level 2
This is for “ spare bandwidt h”.
Level 1
This is t ypically used for non- crit ical “ background” t raffic such as bulk t ransfers t hat
are allowed but t hat should not affect ot her applicat ions and users.
Level 0
Typically used for best- effort t raffic.
DiffServ
QoS is used t o priorit ize source- t o- dest inat ion t raffic flows. All packet s in t he flow are given t he
sam e priorit y. You can use CoS ( class of service) t o give different priorit ies t o different packet
t ypes.
DiffServ ( Different iat ed Services) is a class of service ( CoS) m odel t hat m arks packet s so t hat t hey
receive specific per- hop t reat m ent at DiffServ- com pliant net work devices along t he rout e based on
t he applicat ion t ypes and t raffic flow. Packet s are m arked wit h DiffServ Code Point s ( DSCPs)
indicat ing t he level of service desired. This allows t he int erm ediary DiffServ- com pliant net work
devices t o handle t he packet s different ly depending on t he code point s wit hout t he need t o
negot iat e pat hs or rem em ber st at e inform at ion for every flow. I n addit ion, applicat ions do not have
t o request a part icular service or give advanced not ice of where t he t raffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Different iat ed Services ( DS) field t o replace t he Type of Service ( TOS) field
in t he I P header. The DS field cont ains a 2- bit unused field and a 6- bit DSCP field which can define
up t o 64 service levels. The following figure illust rat es t he DS field.
136
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
DSCP is backward com pat ible wit h t he t hree precedence bit s in t he ToS oct et so t hat non- DiffServ
com pliant , ToS- enabled net work device will not conflict wit h t he DSCP m apping.
DSCP ( 6 bit s)
Unused ( 2 bit s)
The DSCP value det erm ines t he forwarding behavior, t he PHB ( Per- Hop Behavior) , t hat each packet
get s across t he DiffServ net work. Based on t he m arking rule, different kinds of t raffic can be
m arked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can t hen be allocat ed according t o t he DSCP
values and t he configured policies.
IP Precedence
Sim ilar t o I EEE 802.1p priorit izat ion at layer- 2, you can use I P precedence t o priorit ize packet s in a
layer- 3 net work. I P precedence uses t hree bit s of t he eight- bit ToS ( Type of Service) field in t he I P
header. There are eight classes of services ( ranging from zero t o seven) in I P precedence. Zero is
t he lowest priorit y level and seven is t he highest .
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
I f you enable QoS on t he VDSL Rout er, t he VDSL Rout er can aut om at ically base on t he I EEE 802.1p
priorit y level, I P precedence and/ or packet lengt h t o assign priorit y t o t raffic which does not m at ch
a class.
The following t able shows you t he int ernal layer- 2 and layer- 3 QoS m apping on t he VDSL Rout er.
On t he VDSL Rout er, t raffic assigned t o higher priorit y queues get s t hrough fast er while t raffic in
lower index queues is dropped if t he net work is congest ed.
Table 45 I nt ernal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2
LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
000000
000000
> 1100
001110
250~ 1100
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
001100
001010
001000
010110
010100
010010
010000
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
137
Chapter 8 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 45 I nt ernal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2
LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
011110
< 250
011100
011010
011000
100110
100100
100010
100000
101110
101000
138
110000
111000
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Routing
9.1 Overview
The VDSL Rout er usually uses t he default gat eway t o rout e out bound t raffic from com put ers on t he
LAN t o t he I nt ernet . To have t he VDSL Rout er send dat a t o devices not reachable t hrough t he
default gat eway, use st at ic rout es.
For exam ple, t he next figure shows a com put er ( A) connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN int erface.
The VDSL Rout er rout es m ost t raffic from A t o t he I nt ernet t hrough t he VDSL Rout er’s default
gat eway ( R1 ) . You creat e one st at ic rout e t o connect t o services offered by your I SP behind rout er
R2 . You creat e anot her st at ic rout e t o com m unicat e wit h a separat e net work behind a rout er R3
connect ed t o t he LAN.
Figure 50 Exam ple of Rout ing Topology
R1
LAN
WAN
R3
R2
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he D e fa ult Ga t e w a y screen t o select WAN int erfaces t o serve as syst em default gat eways
( Sect ion 9.2 on page 140) .
• Use t he St a t ic Rout e screen t o view and set up st at ic rout es on t he VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 9.3 on
page 140) .
• Use t he Policy For w a r din g screen t o configure policy rout ing on t he Device ( Sect ion 9.4 on
page 142) .
• Use t he RI P screen t o configure RI P set t ings ( Sect ion 9.5 on page 143) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
139
Chapter 9 Routing
9.2 The Default Gateway Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > Rou t ing > D e fa u lt Ga t e w a y t o open t he D e fa ult Ga t e w a y screen.
Use t his screen t o select WAN int erfaces t o serve as syst em default gat eways.
Figure 51 Default Gat eway
Move t he WAN int erfaces t o serve as syst em default gat eways from Ava ila ble Rout e d W AN
I nt e r fa ce s t o Se le ct e d D e fa u lt Ga t e w a y I n t e r fa ce s.
Use t he Se le ct e d W AN I n t e r fa ce field t o select t he preferred WAN int erface t o server as t he VDSL
Rout er’s default I Pv6 gat eway.
Click Apply/ Sa ve t o save your changes.
9.3 The Static Route Screen
Use t his screen t o view and configure t he st at ic rout e rules on t he VDSL Rout er. Click Adva nce d
Se t up > Rout ing > St a t ic Rout e t o open t he following screen.
Figure 52 St at ic Rout e
140
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Routing
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 46 St at ic Rout e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Version
This displays whet her t he ent ry uses I Pv4 or I Pv6.
Dst I P/
PrefixLengt h
This specifies t he I P net work address and prefix lengt h of t he final dest inat ion. Rout ing is
always based on net work num ber.
Gat eway
This is t he I P address of t he gat eway. The gat eway is a rout er or swit ch on t he sam e
net work segm ent as t he device's LAN or WAN port . The gat eway helps forward packet s t o
t heir dest inat ions.
I nt erface
This is t he int erface t his st at ic rout e uses t o forward t raffic for t he list ed dest inat ion
address.
Met ric
The m et ric represent s t he " cost of t ransm ission" . A rout er det erm ines t he best rout e for
t ransm ission by choosing a pat h wit h t he lowest " cost " . The sm aller t he num ber, t he lower
t he " cost " .
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Add
Click t his t o configure a new st at ic rout e.
9.3.1 Add Static Route
Use t his screen t o add a st at ic rout e. Click Add in t he St a t ic Rou t e screen t o display t he following
screen.
Figure 53 St at ic Rout e: Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 47 St at ic Rout e: Add ( Sheet 1 of 2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I P Version
Select whet her your I P t ype is I Pv4 or I Pv6 .
Dest inat ion I P
address/ prefix
lengt h
Ent er t he I Pv4 or I Pv6 address and net work lengt h of t he final dest inat ion.
I nt erface
Select t he int erface t hrough which t his st at ic rout e sends t raffic.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
141
Chapter 9 Routing
Table 47 St at ic Rout e: Add ( Sheet 2 of 2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Gat eway I P
Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he gat eway when you configure a st at ic rout e t hat uses an I P- based
int erface ( such as I PoE, I PoA, or LAN) . The gat eway is a rout er or swit ch on t he sam e
net work segm ent as t he device's LAN or WAN port . The gat eway helps forward packet s t o
t heir dest inat ions.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
9.4 The Policy Routing Screen
Tradit ionally, rout ing is based on t he dest inat ion address only and t he VDSL Rout er t akes t he
short est pat h t o forward a packet . Policy rout ing allows t he VDSL Rout er t o override t he default
rout ing behavior and alt er t he packet rout ing based on t he policy defined by t he net work
adm inist rat or. Policy- based rout ing is applied t o out going packet s, prior t o t he norm al rout ing.
You can use source- based policy rout ing t o direct t raffic from different users t hrough different
connect ions or dist ribut e t raffic am ong m ult iple pat hs for load sharing.
Use t he Policy Rout ing screen t o view and configure rout ing policies on t he VDSL Rout er. Click
Adva n ce d Se t u p > Rou t in g > Policy Rou t in g t o open t he following screen.
Figure 54 Policy Rout ing
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 48 Policy Rout ing
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Policy Nam e
This displays t he nam e of t he rule.
Source I P
This displays t he source I P address.
LAN Port
This displays t he source LAN port num ber.
WAN
This displays t he WAN int erface t hrough which t he t raffic is rout ed.
Default GW
This displays t he default gat eway I P address t he rout e uses.
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Add
Click t his t o creat e a new policy rout ing rule.
9.4.1 Add Policy Routing
Click Add in t he Policy Rout ing screen t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o configure
t he required inform at ion for a policy rout e.
142
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Routing
Figure 55 Policy Rout ing: Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 49 Policy Rout ing: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Policy Nam e
Ent er a descript ive nam e of print able English keyboard charact ers, not including spaces.
Physical LAN
Port
Select t he source LAN Et hernet port num ber.
Source I P
Ent er t he source I P address.
Use I nt erface
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which t he t raffic is sent . You m ust have t he WAN
int erface( s) already configured in t he Br oa dba n d screens.
Default
Gat eway I P
Ent er t he default gat eway I P address t he rout e uses.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
9.5 The RIP Screen
Click Adva nce d Se t up > Rout ing > RI P t o open t he RI P screen. Use t his screen t o configure RI P
set t ings. Rout ing I nform at ion Prot ocol ( RI P, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device t o exchange
rout ing inform at ion wit h ot her rout ers.
Figure 56 RI P
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
143
Chapter 9 Routing
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 50 RI P
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
This is t he nam e of t he int erface in which t he RI P set t ing is used.
Version
The RI P version cont rols t he form at and t he broadcast ing m et hod of t he RI P packet s t hat
t he VDSL Rout er sends ( it recognizes bot h form at s when receiving) . RI P version 1 is
universally support ed but RI P version 2 carries m ore inform at ion. RI P version 1 is probably
adequat e for m ost net works, unless you have an unusual net work t opology.
Operat ion
Select Pa ssive t o have t he VDSL Rout er updat e t he rout ing t able based on t he RI P packet s
received from neighbors but not advert ise it s rout e inform at ion t o ot her rout ers in t his
int erface.
Select Act ive t o have t he VDSL Rout er advert ise it s rout e inform at ion and also list en for
rout ing updat es from neighboring rout ers.
144
Enabled
Select t he check box t o act ivat e t he set t ings.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
10
DNS Setup
10.1 Overview
DNS
DNS ( Dom ain Nam e Syst em ) is for m apping a dom ain nam e t o it s corresponding I P address and
vice versa. The DNS server is ext rem ely im port ant because wit hout it , you m ust know t he I P
address of a m achine before you can access it .
I n addit ion t o t he syst em DNS server( s) , each WAN int erface ( service) is set t o have it s own st at ic
or dynam ic DNS server list . You can configure a DNS st at ic rout e t o forward DNS queries for cert ain
dom ain nam es t hrough a specific WAN int erface t o it s DNS server( s) . The VDSL Rout er uses a
syst em DNS server ( in t he order you specify in t he Br oa dba nd screen) t o resolve dom ain nam es
t hat do not m at ch any DNS rout ing ent ry. Aft er t he VDSL Rout er receives a DNS reply from a DNS
server, it creat es a new ent ry for t he resolved I P address in t he rout ing t able.
Dynamic DNS
Dynam ic DNS allows you t o updat e your current dynam ic I P address wit h one or m any dynam ic
DNS services so t hat anyone can cont act you ( in Net Meet ing, CU- SeeMe, et c.) . You can also access
your FTP server or Web sit e on your own com put er using a dom ain nam e ( for inst ance
m yhost .dhs.org, where m yhost is a nam e of your choice) t hat will never change inst ead of using an
I P address t hat changes each t im e you reconnect . Your friends or relat ives will always be able t o
call you even if t hey don't know your I P address.
First of all, you need t o have regist ered a dynam ic DNS account wit h www.dyndns.org. This is for
people wit h a dynam ic I P from t heir I SP or DHCP server t hat would st ill like t o have a dom ain nam e.
The Dynam ic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he D N S Se r ve r screen t o configure DNS server set t ings ( Sect ion 10.2 on page 146) .
• Use t he D yn a m ic D N S screen t o configure DDNS set t ings on t he VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 10.3 on
page 147) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
145
Chapter 10 DNS Setup
10.1.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling t he wildcard feat ure for your host causes * .yourhost .dyndns.org t o be aliased t o t he sam e
I P address as yourhost .dyndns.org. This feat ure is useful if you want t o be able t o use, for exam ple,
www.yourhost .dyndns.org and st ill reach your host nam e.
I f you have a privat e WAN I P address, t hen you cannot use Dynam ic DNS.
10.2 The DNS Server Screen
Use t his screen t o view and configure DNS rout es on t he VDSL Rout er. Click W ir e le ss ne t w or k >
Cla ssic configur a t ion > Adva nce d Se t up > D N S > D N S Se r ve r t o open t his screen.
Figure 57 DNS Server
146
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 10 DNS Setup
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 51 DNS Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select DNS
Server
I nt erface from
available WAN
int erfaces
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he DNS server addresses from one of t he VDSL
Rout er’s WAN int erfaces.
Select ed
DNS Server
I nt erfaces
Available
WAN
I nt erfaces
Use t he
following St at ic
DNS I P address
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which t o get DNS server addresses.
You can select m ult iple WAN int erfaces for t he device t o t ry. The VDSL Rout er t ries t he WAN
int erfaces in t he order list ed and uses only t he DNS server inform at ion of t he first WAN
int erface t hat connect s; t here is no backup WAN funct ion. To change t he priorit y order
rem ove t hem all and add t hem back in again.
These are t he WAN int erfaces you can select from .
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he DNS server addresses you configure m anually.
Prim ary
DNS server
Ent er t he first DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Secondary
DNS server
Ent er t he second DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Obt ain I Pv6
DNS info from
a WAN
int erface
WAN
I nt erface
select ed
Use t he
following St at ic
I Pv6 DNS
address
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he I Pv6 DNS server addresses from t he I SP
aut om at ically.
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which you want t o obt ain t he I Pv6 DNS relat ed inform at ion.
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er use t he I Pv6 DNS server addresses you configure
m anually.
Prim ary
I Pv6 DNS
server
Ent er t he first I Pv6 DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Secondary
I Pv6 DNS
server
Ent er t he second I Pv6 DNS server address assigned by t he I SP.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
10.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use t his screen t o creat e m anage DDNS ent ries. Click Adva nce d Se t up > D N S > D yna m ic D N S
t o display t he following screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
147
Chapter 10 DNS Setup
Figure 58 Dynam ic DNS
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 52 Dynam ic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Host nam e
This displays t he ent ry’s dom ain nam e.
Usernam e
This displays t he ent ry’s user nam e.
Service
This displays t he ent ry’s Dynam ic DNS service provider.
I nt erface
This displays t he int erface t he DDNS ent ry uses.
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Add
Click t his t o creat e a new DDNS ent ry.
10.3.1 The Dynamic DNS Add Screen
Use t his screen t o creat e a DDNS ent ry. Click t he D yn a m ic D N S screen’s Add but t on t o display t he
following screen.
Figure 59 Dynam ic DNS Add
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 53 Dynam ic DNS Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
D- DNS provider
Select your Dynam ic DNS service provider from t he drop- down list box.
Host nam e
Type t he dom ain nam e assigned t o your VDSL Rout er by your Dynam ic DNS provider.
You can specify up t o t wo host nam es in t he field separat ed by a com m a ( " ," ) .
148
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 10 DNS Setup
Table 53 Dynam ic DNS Add ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nt erface
Select t he int erface t he DDNS ent ry uses.
Usernam e
Type your user nam e.
Password
Type t he password assigned t o you.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
149
Chapter 10 DNS Setup
150
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
11
UPnP
11.1 Overview
Universal Plug and Play ( UPnP) is a dist ribut ed, open net working st andard t hat uses TCP/ I P for
sim ple peer- t o- peer net work connect ivit y bet ween devices. A UPnP device can dynam ically j oin a
net work, obt ain an I P address, convey it s capabilit ies and learn about ot her devices on t he net work.
I n t urn, a device can leave a net work sm oot hly and aut om at ically when it is no longer in use.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
Use t he UPnP screen t o enable UPnP on t he VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 11.2 on page 152) .
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is ident ified as an icon in t he Net work Connect ions folder ( Windows XP) . Each UPnP
com pat ible device inst alled on your net work will appear as a separat e icon. Select ing t he icon of a
UPnP device will allow you t o access t he inform at ion and propert ies of t hat device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT t raversal aut om at es t he process of allowing an applicat ion t o operat e t hrough NAT. UPnP
net work devices can aut om at ically configure net work addressing, announce t heir presence in t he
net work t o ot her UPnP devices and enable exchange of sim ple product and service descript ions.
NAT t raversal allows t he following:
• Dynam ic port m apping
• Learning public I P addresses
• Assigning lease t im es t o m appings
Windows Messenger is an exam ple of an applicat ion t hat support s NAT t raversal and UPnP.
See t he Chapt er 6 on page 115 for m ore inform at ion on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The aut om at ed nat ure of NAT t raversal applicat ions in est ablishing t heir own services and opening
firewall port s m ay present net work securit y issues. Net work inform at ion and configurat ion m ay also
be obt ained and m odified by users in som e net work environm ent s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
151
Chapter 11 UPnP
When a UPnP device j oins a net work, it announces it s presence wit h a m ult icast m essage. For
securit y reasons, t he VDSL Rout er allows m ult icast m essages on t he LAN only.
All UPnP- enabled devices m ay com m unicat e freely wit h each ot her wit hout addit ional configurat ion.
Disable UPnP if t his is not your int ent ion.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP cert ificat ion from t he Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
I m plem ent ers Corp. ( UI C) . ZyXEL's UPnP im plem ent at ion support s I nt ernet Gat eway Device ( I GD)
1.0.
See Sect ion 11.3 on page 152 for exam ples of inst alling and using UPnP.
11.2 The UPnP Screen
Use t he following screen t o enable or disable UPnP on your VDSL Rout er. Click Adva n ce d Se t up >
UPn P t o display t he screen shown next .
Figure 60 Net work Set t ing > Hom e Net working > UPnP
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 54 Net work Set t ing > Hom e Net working > UPnP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable UPnP
Select t his t o allow UPnP- enabled applicat ions t o aut om at ically configure t he VDSL Rout er
so t hat t hey can com m unicat e t hrough t he VDSL Rout er by using NAT t raversal. UPnP
applicat ions aut om at ically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order t o com m unicat e wit h
anot her UPnP enabled device; t his elim inat es t he need t o m anually configure port
forwarding for t he UPnP enabled applicat ion.
Be aware t hat anyone could use a UPnP applicat ion t o open t he web configurat or's login
screen wit hout ent ering t he VDSL Rout er's I P address ( alt hough you m ust st ill ent er t he
password t o access t he web configurat or) .
Apply/ Save
Click t his t o save your changes.
11.3 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Example
This sect ion shows how t o inst all UPnP in Windows Windows XP.
152
Click St a r t and Con t r ol Pa n e l.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 11 UPnP
Double- click N e t w or k Conne ct ions.
I n t he N e t w or k Conne ct ions window, click Adva n ce d in t he m ain m enu and select Opt iona l
N e t w or k in g Com pon e n t s ….
Network Connections
The W in dow s Opt ion a l N e t w or k in g Com pon e n t s W iza r d window displays. Select N e t w or k in g
Se r vice in t he Com pon e n t s select ion box and click D e t a ils.
Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
I n t he N e t w or k ing Se r vice s window, select t he Unive r sa l Plug a nd Pla y check box.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
153
Chapter 11 UPnP
Networking Services
Click OK t o go back t o t he W indow s Opt ion a l N e t w or k ing Com pone nt W iz a r d window and
click N e x t .
11.4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This sect ion shows you how t o use t he UPnP feat ure in Windows XP. You m ust already have UPnP
inst alled in Windows XP and UPnP act ivat ed on t he VDSL Rout er.
Make sure t he com put er is connect ed t o a LAN port of t he VDSL Rout er. Turn on your com put er and
t he VDSL Rout er.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
154
Click St a r t and Con t r ol Pa n e l. Double- click N e t w or k Con ne ct ion s. An icon displays under
I nt ernet Gat eway.
Right- click t he icon and select Pr ope r t ie s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 11 UPnP
Network Connections
I n t he I nt e r ne t Conne ct ion Pr ope r t ie s window, click Se t t ings t o see t he port m appings t here
were aut om at ically creat ed.
Internet Connection Properties
You m ay edit or delet e t he port m appings or click Add t o m anually add port m appings.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
155
Chapter 11 UPnP
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
When t he UPnP- enabled device is disconnect ed from your com put er, all port m appings will be
delet ed aut om at ically.
Select Sh ow icon in not ifica t ion a r e a w he n conn e ct e d opt ion and click OK. An icon displays in
t he syst em t ray.
System Tray Icon
156
Double- click on t he icon t o display your current I nt ernet connect ion st at us.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 11 UPnP
Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
Wit h UPnP, you can access t he web- based configurat or on t he VDSL Rout er wit hout finding out t he
I P address of t he VDSL Rout er first . This com es helpful if you do not know t he I P address of t he
VDSL Rout er.
Follow t he st eps below t o access t he web configurat or.
Click St a r t and t hen Cont r ol Pa ne l.
Double- click N e t w or k Conne ct ions.
Select M y N e t w or k Pla ce s under Ot h e r Pla ce s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
157
Chapter 11 UPnP
Network Connections
An icon wit h t he descript ion for each UPnP- enabled device displays under Loca l N e t w or k .
Right- click on t he icon for your VDSL Rout er and select I nvok e . The web configurat or login screen
displays.
Network Connections: My Network Places
158
Right- click on t he icon for your VDSL Rout er and select Pr ope r t ie s. A propert ies window displays
wit h basic inform at ion about t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 11 UPnP
Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
159
Chapter 11 UPnP
160
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
12
USB Services
12.1 Overview
The VDSL Rout er has a USB port used t o share files via a USB m em ory st ick or a USB hard drive. I n
t he USB Se r vice screens, you can enable file- sharing server, m edia server, and print er server.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he File Sh a r ing screen t o configure a file- sharing server ( Sect ion 12.2 on page 162) .
• Use t he Pr in t e r Se r ve r screen t o enable t he print server ( Sect ion 12.3 on page 165) .
• Use t he M e dia Se r ve r screen t o enable or disable t he sharing of m edia files ( Sect ion 12.4 on
page 166) .
12.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t his chapt er.
12.1.2.1 About File Sharing
Workgroup name
This is t he nam e given t o a set of com put ers t hat are connect ed on a net work and share resources
such as a print er or files. Windows aut om at ically assigns t he workgroup nam e when you set up a
net work.
Shares
When set t ings are set t o default , each USB device connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er is given a folder,
called a “ share”. I f a USB hard drive connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er has m ore t han one part it ion,
t hen each part it ion will be allocat ed a share. You can also configure a “ share” t o be a sub- folder or
file on t he USB device.
File Systems
A file syst em is a way of st oring and organizing files on your hard drive and st orage device. Oft en
different operat ing syst em s such as Windows or Linux have different file syst em s. The file sharing
feat ure on your VDSL Rout er support s File Allocat ion Table ( FAT) and FAT32.
Common Internet File System
The VDSL Rout er uses Com m on I nt ernet File Syst em ( CI FS) prot ocol for it s file sharing funct ions.
CI FS com pat ible com put ers can access t he USB file st orage devices connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
161
Chapter 12 USB Services
CI FS prot ocol is support ed on Microsoft Windows, Linux Sam ba and ot her operat ing syst em s ( refer
t o your syst em s specificat ions for CI FS com pat ibilit y) .
12.1.2.2 About Printer Server
Print Server
This is a com put er or ot her device which m anages one or m ore print ers, and which sends print j obs
t o each print er from t he com put er it self or ot her devices.
Operating System
An operat ing syst em ( OS) is t he int erface which helps you m anage a com put er. Com m on exam ples
are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux.
TCP/IP
TCP/ I P ( Transm ission Cont rol Prot ocol/ I nt ernet Prot ocol) is a set of com m unicat ions prot ocols t hat
m ost of t he I nt ernet runs on.
Port
A port m aps a net work service such as ht t p t o a process running on your com put er, such as a
process run by your web browser. When t raffic from t he I nt ernet is received on your com put er, t he
port num ber is used t o ident ify which process running on your com put er it is int ended for.
Supported OSs
Your operat ing syst em m ust support TCP/ I P port s for print ing and be com pat ible wit h t he RAW ( port
9100) prot ocol.
The following OSs support VDSL Rout er’s print er sharing feat ure.
• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE ( Second Edit ion) , Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP or Macint osh OS X.
12.2 The File Sharing Screen
You can share files on a USB m em ory st ick or hard drive connect ed t o your VDSL Rout er wit h users
on your net work.
The following figure is an overview of t he VDSL Rout er’s file server feat ure. Com put ers A and B can
access files on a USB device ( C) which is connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er.
162
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 12 USB Services
Figure 61 File Sharing Overview
The VDSL Rout er will not be able t o j oin t he workgroup if your local area net work has
rest rict ions set up t hat do not allow devices t o j oin a workgroup. I n t his case, cont act your
net work adm inist rat or.
12.2.1 Before You Begin
Make sure t he VDSL Rout er is connect ed t o your net work and t urned on.
Connect t he USB device t o one of t he VDSL Rout er’s USB port . Make sure t he VDSL Rout er is
connect ed t o your net work.
The VDSL Rout er det ect s t he USB device and m akes it s cont ent s available for browsing. I f you are
connect ing a USB hard drive t hat com es wit h an ext ernal power supply, m ake sure it is connect ed
t o an appropriat e power source t hat is on.
Not e: I f your USB device cannot be det ect ed by t he VDSL Rout er, see t he t roubleshoot ing
for suggest ions.
Use t his screen t o set up file sharing using t he VDSL Rout er. To access t his screen, Click Adva nce d
Se t up > USB Se r vice s > File Sh a r in g.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
163
Chapter 12 USB Services
Figure 62 Net work Set t ing > USB Service > File Sharing
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 55 Net work Set t ing > Hom e Net working > File Sharing
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable File
Sharing
Services
( SAMBA)
Select t his t o act ivat e file sharing t hrough t he VDSL Rout er.
Workgroup
Nam e
You can add t he VDSL Rout er t o an exist ing or a new workgroup on your net work. Ent er t he
nam e of t he workgroup which your VDSL Rout er aut om at ically j oins.
You can set t he VDSL Rout er’s workgroup nam e t o be exact ly t he sam e as t he workgroup
nam e t o which your com put er belongs.
Note: The VDSL Router will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has
restrictions set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact
your network administrator.
Add new user
Click t his t o set up a file- sharing account . Before you can share files you need a user
account .
Rem ove
Click t his t o delet e t he user account ( s) who’s D e le t e check box is select ed.
Enabled
This field displays whet her a user account is act ivat ed or not . Select t he check box t o enable
t he account . Clear t he check box t o disable t he account .
User Nam e
This displays t he user nam e t hat has been configured on t he VDSL Rout er for file sharing.
Delet e
Select t he check box of t he user account t hat you want t o rem ove from t he list .
Apply/ Save
Click t his t o save your changes t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Cancel
Click t his t o set every field in t his screen t o it s last- saved value.
12.2.2 Add New File Sharing User
Click t he File Sh a r in g screen’s Add n e w u se r but t on t o set up a new file sharing user on t he VDSL
Rout er.
164
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 12 USB Services
Figure 63 File Sharing: Add new user
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 56 File Sharing: Add new user
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Usernam e
Ent er a user nam e t hat will be allowed t o access shares. You can ent er up t o 16
charact ers. Only let t ers and num bers allowed.
Password
Ent er t he password used t o access t he share. You can ent er up t o 16 charact ers. Only
let t ers and num bers are allowed. The password is case sensit ive.
Password
( Confirm )
Ret ype t he password t hat you ent ered above.
Apply
Click t his t o save your changes t o t he VDSL Rout er.
12.3 The Printer Server Screen
The VDSL Rout er allows you t o share a USB print er on your LAN. You can do t his by connect ing a
USB print er t o one of t he USB port s on t he VDSL Rout er and t hen configuring a TCP/ I P port on t he
com put ers connect ed t o your net work.
Figure 64 Sharing a USB Print er
12.3.1 Before You Begin
To configure t he print server you need t he following:
• Your VDSL Rout er m ust be connect ed t o your com put er and any ot her devices on your net work.
The USB print er m ust be connect ed t o your VDSL Rout er.
• A USB print er wit h t he driver already inst alled on your com put er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
165
Chapter 12 USB Services
• The com put ers on your net work m ust have t he print er soft ware already inst alled before t hey can
creat e a TCP/ I P port for print ing via t he net work. Follow your print er m anufact urers inst ruct ions
on how t o inst all t he print er soft ware on your com put er.
Not e: Your print er ’s inst allat ion inst ruct ions m ay ask t hat you connect t he print er t o your
com put er. Connect your print er t o t he VDSL Rout er inst ead.
Use t his screen t o enable or disable sharing of a USB print er via your VDSL Rout er.
To access t his screen, click Adva n ce d Se t up > USB Se r vice s > Pr int Se r ve r.
Figure 65 Print Server
The following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.
Table 57 Net work Set t ing > USB Service > Print Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable print server
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er share a USB print er.
Print er nam e
Ent er t he nam e of t he print er.
Make and m odel
Ent er t he m anufact urer and m odel num ber of t he print er.
Apply/ Save
Click t his t o save your changes t o t he VDSL Rout er.
12.4 The Media Server Screen
The m edia server st ream s video, m usic, and phot o files from USB st orage t o DLNA- com pliant m edia
client s on your net work. Connect t he USB st orage device t o t he VDSL Rout er’s USB port . See
Sect ion 2.11 on page 43 for exam ples of using t he m edia server wit h following m edia client s.
Not e: Anyone on your net wor k can play t he m edia files in t he published shares. The
m edia server does not use user nam e and password or ot her form s of securit y.
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > USB Se r vice s > M e dia Se r ve r t o open t his screen and change your
VDSL Rout er’s m edia server set t ings.
166
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 12 USB Services
Figure 66 Media Server
The following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.
Table 58 Media Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable digit al
m edia server
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er funct ion as a DLNA- com pliant m edia server so DLNAcom pliant m edia client s on your net work can play m edia files locat ed in t he shares.
Media Library
Pat h
Ent er t he pat h client s use t o access t he m edia files on a USB st orage device connect ed t o
t he VDSL Rout er.
Apply/ Save
Click t his t o save your changes t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
167
Chapter 12 USB Services
168
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
13
Certificates
13.1 Overview
The VDSL Rout er can use cert ificat es ( also called digit al I Ds) t o aut hent icat e users. Cert ificat es are
based on public- privat e key pairs. A cert ificat e cont ains t he cert ificat e owner ’s ident it y and public
key. Cert ificat es provide a way t o exchange public keys for use in aut hent icat ion.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screens t o generat e cert ificat ion request s and im port t he VDSL
Rout er's CA- signed cert ificat es ( Sect ion 13.4 on page 173) .
• Use t he Tr u st e d CA screen t o save t he cert ificat es of t rust ed CAs t o t he VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion
13.4 on page 173) .
13.2 What You Need to Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough t his chapt er.
Certification Authority
A Cert ificat ion Aut horit y ( CA) issues cert ificat es and guarant ees t he ident it y of each cert ificat e
owner. There are com m ercial cert ificat ion aut horit ies like CyberTrust or VeriSign and governm ent
cert ificat ion aut horit ies. The cert ificat ion aut horit y uses it s privat e key t o sign cert ificat es. Anyone
can t hen use t he cert ificat ion aut horit y's public key t o verify t he cert ificat es. You can use t he VDSL
Rout er t o generat e cert ificat ion request s t hat cont ain ident ifying inform at ion and public keys and
t hen send t he cert ificat ion request s t o a cert ificat ion aut horit y.
13.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > Ce r t ifica t e t o open t he Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen. This screen displays
t he VDSL Rout er’s list of cert ificat es and cert ificat ion request s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
169
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 67 Local Cert ificat es
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 59 Local Cert ificat es
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Nam e
This field displays t he nam e used t o ident ify t his cert ificat e. I t is recom m ended t hat you
give each cert ificat e a unique nam e.
I n Use
This field shows whet her or not t he VDSL Rout er current ly uses t he cert ificat e.
Subj ect
This field displays ident ifying inform at ion about t he cert ificat e’s owner, such as CN
( Com m on Nam e) , OU ( Organizat ional Unit or depart m ent ) , O ( Organizat ion or com pany)
and C ( Count ry) . I t is recom m ended t hat each cert ificat e have unique subj ect
inform at ion.
Type
This field displays whet her t he ent ry is for a cert ificat e or a cert ificat e request .
Act ion
Click t he V ie w but t on t o open a screen wit h an in- dept h list of inform at ion about t he
cert ificat e ( or cert ificat ion request ) .
For a cert ificat ion request , click Loa d Sign e d t o im port t he signed cert ificat e.
Click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t he cert ificat e ( or cert ificat ion request ) . You cannot
delet e a cert ificat e t hat one or m ore feat ures is configured t o use.
Creat e Cert ificat e
Request
Click t his but t on t o go t o t he screen where you can have t he VDSL Rout er generat e a
cert ificat ion request .
I m port Cert ificat e
Click t his but t on t o save t he cert ificat e t hat you have enrolled from a cert ificat ion
aut horit y from your com put er t o t he VDSL Rout er.
13.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click t he Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen’s Cr e a t e Ce r t ifica t e Re que st but t on t o open t he following
screen. Use t his screen t o have t he VDSL Rout er generat e a cert ificat ion request .
170
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 68 Creat e Cert ificat e Request
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 60 Creat e Cert ificat e Request
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Cert ificat e Nam e
Type up t o 63 ASCI I charact ers ( not including spaces) t o ident ify t his cert ificat e.
Com m on Nam e
Select Au t o t o have t he VDSL Rout er configure t his field aut om at ically. Or select
Cu st om iz e t o ent er it m anually.
Type t he I P address ( in dot t ed decim al not at ion) , dom ain nam e or e- m ail address in
t he field provided. The dom ain nam e or e- m ail address can be up t o 63 ASCI I
charact ers. The dom ain nam e or e- m ail address is for ident ificat ion purposes only
and can be any st ring.
Organizat ion Nam e
Type up t o 63 charact ers t o ident ify t he com pany or group t o which t he cert ificat e
owner belongs. You m ay use any charact er, including spaces, but t he VDSL Rout er
drops t railing spaces.
St at e/ Province Nam e
Type up t o 32 charact ers t o ident ify t he st at e or province where t he cert ificat e owner
is locat ed. You m ay use any charact er, including spaces, but t he VDSL Rout er drops
t railing spaces.
Count ry/ Region Nam e
Select a count ry t o ident ify t he nat ion where t he cert ificat e owner is locat ed.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes.
Aft er you click Apply, t he following screen displays t o not ify you t hat you need t o get t he cert ificat e
request signed by a Cert ificat e Aut horit y. I f you already have, click Loa d_ Signe d t o im port t he
signed cert ificat e int o t he VDSL Rout er. Ot herwise click Ba ck t o ret urn t o t he Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s
screen.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
171
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 69 Cert ificat e Request Creat ed
13.3.2 Load Signed Certificate
Aft er you creat e a cert ificat e request and have it signed by a Cert ificat e Aut horit y, in t he Loca l
Ce r t ifica t e s screen click t he cert ificat e request ’s Loa d Signe d but t on t o im port t he signed
cert ificat e int o t he VDSL Rout er.
Not e: You m ust rem ove any spaces from t he cert ificat e’s filenam e before you can im port
it .
172
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 70 Load Signed Cert ificat e
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 61 Load Signed Cert ificat e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Cert ificat e Nam e
This is t he nam e of t he signed cert ificat e.
Cert ificat e
Copy and past e t he signed cert ificat e int o t he t ext box t o st ore it on t he VDSL Rout er.
Apply
Click Apply t o save your changes.
13.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Adva n ce d Se t up > Ce r t ifica t e > Tr u st e d CA t o open t he following screen. This screen
displays a sum m ary list of cert ificat es of t he cert ificat ion aut horit ies t hat you have set t he VDSL
Rout er t o accept as t rust ed. The VDSL Rout er accept s any valid cert ificat e signed by a cert ificat ion
aut horit y on t his list as being t rust wort hy; t hus you do not need t o im port any cert ificat e t hat is
signed by one of t hese cert ificat ion aut horit ies.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
173
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 71 Trust ed CA
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 62 Trust ed CA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Nam e
This field displays t he nam e used t o ident ify t his cert ificat e.
Subj ect
This field displays inform at ion t hat ident ifies t he owner of t he cert ificat e, such as Com m on
Nam e ( CN) , OU ( Organizat ional Unit or depart m ent ) , Organizat ion ( O) , St at e ( ST) and
Count ry ( C) . I t is recom m ended t hat each cert ificat e have unique subj ect inform at ion.
Type
This field displays general inform at ion about t he cert ificat e. ca m eans t hat a Cert ificat ion
Aut horit y signed t he cert ificat e.
Act ion
Click t he Vie w icon t o open a screen wit h an in- dept h list of inform at ion about t he
cert ificat e ( or cert ificat ion request ) .
Click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t he cert ificat e ( or cert ificat ion request ) . You cannot
delet e a cert ificat e t hat one or m ore feat ures is configured t o use.
I m port
Cert ificat e
Click t his but t on t o open a screen where you can save t he cert ificat e of a cert ificat ion
aut horit y t hat you t rust t o t he VDSL Rout er.
13.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click t he Vie w icon in t he Tr u st e d CA screen t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o view
in- dept h inform at ion about t he cert ificat ion aut horit y’s cert ificat e.
174
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 72 Trust ed CA: View
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 63 Trust ed CA: View
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Nam e
This field displays t he ident ifying nam e of t his cert ificat e.
Type
This field displays general inform at ion about t he cert ificat e. ca m eans t hat a Cert ificat ion
Aut horit y signed t he cert ificat e.
Subj ect
This field displays inform at ion t hat ident ifies t he owner of t he cert ificat e, such as Com m on
Nam e ( CN) , Organizat ional Unit ( OU) , Organizat ion ( O) and Count ry ( C) .
Cert ificat e
This read- only t ext box displays t he cert ificat e in Privacy Enhanced Mail ( PEM) form at . PEM
uses base 64 t o convert t he binary cert ificat e int o a print able form .
You can copy and past e t he cert ificat e int o an e- m ail t o send t o friends or colleagues or you
can copy and past e t he cert ificat e int o a t ext edit or and save t he file on a m anagem ent
com put er for lat er dist ribut ion ( via floppy disk for exam ple) .
Back
Click Ba ck t o ret urn t o t he previous screen.
13.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click t he Tr ust e d CA screen’s I m por t Ce r t ifica t e but t on t o open t he following screen. The VDSL
Rout er t rust s any valid cert ificat e signed by any of t he im port ed t rust ed CA cert ificat es.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
175
Chapter 13 Certificates
Figure 73 Trust ed CA: I m port Cert ificat e
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 64 Trust ed CA: I m port Cert ificat e
176
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Cert ificat e Nam e
Type a nam e for t he signed cert ificat e.
Cert ificat e
Copy and past e t he cert ificat e int o t he t ext box t o st ore it on t he VDSL Rout er.
Apply
Click t his t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
14
Wireless
14.1 Overview
This chapt er describes t he VDSL Rout er’s N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss screens. Use t hese
screens t o set up your VDSL Rout er’s wireless connect ion.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This sect ion describes t he VDSL Rout er’s W ir e le ss screens. Use t hese screens t o set up your VDSL
Rout er’s wireless connect ion.
• Use t he Ba sic screen t o enable t he Wireless LAN, ent er t he SSI D and configure basic set t ings
( Sect ion 14.2 on page 178) .
• Use t he Se cu r it y screen t o configure wireless securit y set t ings m anually or t hrough WPS
( Sect ion 14.3 on page 179) .
• Use t he M AC Filt e r screen t o allow or deny wireless client s based on t heir MAC addresses from
connect ing t o t he VDSL Rout er ( Sect ion 14.4 on page 183) .
• Use t he Adva nce d screen t o configure wireless advanced feat ures, such as t he RTS/ CTS
Threshold ( Sect ion 14.5 on page 184) .
• Use t he St a t ion I nfo screen t o display a list of connect ed wireless client s ( Sect ion 14.6 on page
186) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
177
Chapter 14 Wireless
14.1.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“ Wireless” is essent ially radio com m unicat ion. I n t he sam e way t hat walkie- t alkie radios send and
receive inform at ion over t he airwaves, wireless net working devices exchange inform at ion wit h one
anot her. A wireless net working device is j ust like a radio t hat let s your com put er exchange
inform at ion wit h radios at t ached t o ot her com put ers. Like walkie- t alkies, m ost wireless net working
devices operat e at radio frequency bands t hat are open t o t he public and do not require a license t o
use. However, wireless net working is different from t hat of m ost t radit ional radio com m unicat ions in
t hat t here a num ber of wireless net working st andards available wit h different m et hods of dat a
encrypt ion.
Finding Out More
See Sect ion 14.7 on page 186 for advanced t echnical inform at ion on wireless net works.
14.2 The Basic Screen
Use t his screen t o enable t he Wireless LAN, ent er t he SSI D and select t he wireless securit y m ode.
Not e: I f you configure t he VDSL Rout er from a com put er connect ed t o t he wireless LAN
and you change t he VDSL Rout er’s SSI D, channel or securit y set t ings, you lose
your w ireless connect ion when you click Apply/ Sa v e . Change t he com put er ’s
wireless set t ings t o m at ch t he VDSL Rout er’s new set t ings.
Click W ir e le ss t o open t he Ba sic screen.
Figure 74 Wireless: Basic
178
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
The following t able describes t he general wireless LAN labels in t his screen.
Table 65 Wireless: Basic
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Net work Set up
Enable Wireless
Turn t he wireless LAN on or off.
Hide Access
Point
Select t his check box t o hide t he SSI D in t he out going beacon fram e so a st at ion cannot
obt ain t he SSI D t hrough scanning using a sit e survey t ool.
Enable Wireless
Mult icast
Forwarding
Select t his check box t o convert wireless m ult icast t raffic int o wireless unicast t raffic.
SSI D
The SSI D ( Service Set I Dent it y) ident ifies t he service set wit h which a wireless device is
associat ed and serves as a nam e for t he wireless net work. Wireless devices associat ing t o
t he access point ( AP) m ust have t he sam e SSI D.
Ent er a descript ive nam e ( up t o 32 English keyboard charact ers) for t he wireless LAN.
BSSI D
This shows t he MAC address of t he wireless int erface on t he VDSL Rout er when wireless LAN
is enabled.
Max Client s
Set a lim it for how m any wireless client s can connect t o t he VDSL Rout er at a t im e.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
14.3 Wireless Security
Click W ir e le ss > Se cur it y t o open t he Se cur it y screen. Set N e t w or k Aut he nt ica t ion t o Ope n
and W EP Encr ypt ion t o D isa ble d t o allow wireless st at ions t o com m unicat e wit h t he VDSL Rout er
wit hout any dat a encrypt ion or aut hent icat ion.
Not e: I f you do not enable any wireless securit y on your VDSL Rout er, your net work is
accessible t o any wireless net working device t hat is wit hin range.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
179
Chapter 14 Wireless
Figure 75 Wireless: Securit y
180
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 66 Wireless: Securit y
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable WPS
Use WiFi Prot ect ed Set up ( WPS) t o quickly set up a wireless net work wit hout having t o
m anually configure set t ings. Set up each WPS connect ion bet ween t wo devices at a t im e.
WPS is not available when using WPA or WPA 2.
Add Client
Use t his sect ion t o add a wireless client t o t he wireless net work.
Select Pu sh - Bu t t on t o add a client by pressing a but t on on t he VDSL Rout er and t he
wireless client . This is t he easiest m et hod.
Select En t e r STA PI N t o add a client by ent ering t he client ’s Personal I dent ificat ion
Num ber ( PI N) in t he field t hat displays when you select t his opt ion.
Select Use AP PI N t o add a client by ent ering t he AP’s PI N from t he D e vice PI N field in
t he client ’s WPS configurat ion.
Add Enrollee
Click t his t o use WPS t o add a wireless client t o your wireless net work.
Note: You must also activate WPS on the client within two minutes.
Set WPS AP Mode
Con figu r e d uses t he VDSL Rout er’s current wireless securit y set t ings for WPS.
Un con figu r e d has t he VDSL Rout er change it s wireless securit y set t ings when you do
one of t he following:
•
•
•
Device PI N
Add a wireless enrollee. The VDSL Rout er aut om at ically uses WPA2- PSK and a random
key. The W PS AP M ode aut om at ically changes t o Con figu r e d.
Use Se t u p AP t o have an ext ernal regist rar ( like Windows Vist a) configure t he VDSL
Rout er’s wireless securit y set t ings. The W PS AP M ode aut om at ically changes t o
Con figu r e d.
Manually configure t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless securit y set t ings. Then you can
m anually set t he W PS AP M ode t o Configu r e d.
This shows t he VDSL Rout er’s PI N. Ent er t his PI N in t he ext ernal regist rar wit hin t wo
m inut es of clicking Con fig AP.
Ent er t his PI N in t he client ’s WPS configurat ion if you select ed Use AP PI N .
Config AP
Click Con fig AP t o have an ext ernal regist rar configure t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless
securit y set t ings. See Sect ion 14.7.8 on page 198 for how t o use Windows Vist a as an
ext ernal regist rar. Pu sh Bu t t on and PI N are reserved for fut ure use and have no effect
at t he t im e of writ ing.
Note: After you click Config AP you must enter the VDSL Router’s PIN in the external
registrar within two minutes.
WPS Wireless ER
This is available when you set t he W PS AP M ode t o Con figu r e d. Click En a ble / D isa ble
t o have an ext ernal regist rar such as an I nt el wireless st at ion use WPS t o add wireless
client s and t hen aut hent icat e t hem whenever t hey connect t o t he wireless net work.
I f you used a Window s Vist a com put er t o configure t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless set t ings,
you can also use t he Windows Vist a com put er t o add and aut hent icat e wireless client s
wit hout using W PS W ir e le ss ER. See Sect ion 14.7.8 on page 198 for det ails.
Note: After you click Enable/Disable you must enter the VDSL Router’s PIN in the external
registrar within two minutes.
Then click En a ble / D isa ble again.
WPS 2.0
Select t his t o support WPS 2.0.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
181
Chapter 14 Wireless
Table 66 Wireless: Securit y
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Net work
Aut hent icat ion
Use t he st rongest aut hent icat ion m et hod t hat t he wireless client s all support .
W PA2 or W PA uses an ext ernal RADI US server t o aut hent icat e a separat e user nam e
and password for each user. While WPA2 offers t he st rongest securit y, m ore wireless
client s support WPA.
M ix e d W PA2 / W PA support s WPA and WPA2 sim ult aneously.
W PA2 - PSK or W PA- PSK uses a com m on password for all client s. While WPA2- PSK offers
st ronger securit y, m ore wireless client s support WPA- PSK.
M ix e d W PA2 / W PA - PSK support s WPA2- PSK and WPA- PSK sim ult aneously.
Choose Ope n t o allow all wireless connect ions wit hout aut hent icat ion.
WPA2
Preaut hent icat ion
This field displays when you select W PA2 or M ix e d W PA2 / W PA.
Enable pre- aut hent icat ion for fast roam ing by allowing a wireless client already connect ed
t o an AP t o perform I EEE 802.1x aut hent icat ion wit h anot her AP before connect ing t o it .
Net work Re- aut h
I nt erval
This field displays when you select W PA2 or M ix e d W PA2 / W PA.
WPA Group Rekey
I nt erval
Set t he rat e at which t he AP ( if using WPA( 2) - PSK key m anagem ent ) or RADI US server ( if
using WPA( 2) key m anagem ent ) sends a new group key out t o all client s. The re- keying
process is t he WPA( 2) equivalent of aut om at ically changing t he WEP key for an AP and all
st at ions in a WLAN on a periodic basis.
RADI US Server I P
Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he ext ernal aut hent icat ion server in dot t ed decim al not at ion.
RADI US Port
Ent er t he port num ber of t he ext ernal aut hent icat ion server. The default port num ber is
1 8 1 2 . You need not change t his value unless your net work adm inist rat or inst ruct s you t o
do so wit h addit ional inform at ion.
RADI US Key
Ent er a password ( up t o 31 alphanum eric charact ers) as t he key t o be shared bet ween
t he ext ernal RADI US server and t he VDSL Rout er. The key m ust be t he sam e on t he
RADI US server and your VDSL Rout er. The key is not sent over t he net work.
WPA/ WAPI
Encrypt ion
Select t he encrypt ion t ype ( AES or TKI P+ AES) for dat a encrypt ion.
Specify how oft en wireless st at ions have t o resend usernam es and passwords in order t o
st ay connect ed. I f wireless st at ion aut hent icat ion is done using a RADI US server, t he
reaut hent icat ion t im er on t he RADI US server has priorit y.
Select AES if your wireless client s can all use AES.
Select TKI P+ AES t o allow t he wireless client s t o use eit her TKI P or AES.
Generat e
password
aut om at ically
This field displays when you select WPA( 2) - PSK.
WPA/ WAPI
passphrase
This field displays when you select WPA( 2) - PSK.
WEP Encrypt ion
This field displays when you set N e t w or k Au t h e n t ica t ion t o Ope n . Enable WEP
encrypt ion t o scram ble t he wireless dat a t ransm issions bet ween t he wireless st at ions and
t he access point s ( AP) t o keep net work com m unicat ions privat e. Bot h t he wireless
st at ions and t he access point s m ust use t he sam e WEP key.
Select t his opt ion t o have t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically generat e a password. The
password field becom es read- only.
Ent er 16 t o 63 alphanum eric charact ers ( 0- 9, A-Z, wit h no spaces) . I t m ust cont ain bot h
let t ers and num bers and is case- sensit ive. Click t he link t o display t he password.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Attackers can break it using widely-available software. It
is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism.
Encrypt ion
St rengt h
182
I f you are using WEP encrypt ion, select 6 4 - bit or 1 2 8 - bit t o set t he lengt h of t he
encrypt ion key.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
Table 66 Wireless: Securit y
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Net w ork
Key
This field displays when you enable WEP encrypt ion. Configure up t o four 64- bit or 128- bit
WEP keys. Use t his field t o select which one t he net work uses.
Net work Key 1~ 4
These fields display when you enable WEP encrypt ion. WEP uses a net work key t o encrypt
dat a. The VDSL Rout er and wireless client s m ust use t he sam e net work key ( password) .
I f you chose 6 4 - bit WEP, t hen ent er any 5 ASCI I charact ers or 10 hexadecim al charact ers
( " 0- 9" , " A- F" ) .
I f you chose 1 2 8 - bit WEP, t hen ent er 13 ASCI I charact ers or 26 hexadecim al charact ers
( " 0- 9" , " A- F" ) .
You m ust configure at least one password.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
14.4 MAC Filter
Click W ir e le ss > M AC Filt e r t o open t he M AC Filt e r screen. This screen allows you t o configure
t he VDSL Rout er t o give exclusive access t o specific devices ( Allow ) or exclude specific devices
from accessing t he VDSL Rout er ( D e ny) . Every Et hernet device has a unique MAC ( Media Access
Cont rol) address assigned at t he fact ory. I t consist s of six pairs of hexadecim al charact ers, for
exam ple, 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02. You need t o know t he MAC addresses of t he devices t o configure t his
screen.
Figure 76 Wireless > MAC Aut hent icat ion
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 67 Wireless > MAC Aut hent icat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Restrict
Mode
Define t he filt er act ion for t he list of MAC addresses in t he M AC Addr e ss t able.
Select D isa ble d t o t urn off MAC filt ering.
Select Allow t o perm it access t o t he VDSL Rout er. MAC addresses not list ed will be denied
access t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Select D e n y t o block access t o t he VDSL Rout er. MAC addresses not list ed will be allowed t o
access t he VDSL Rout er.
MAC Address
This displays t he MAC addresses of t he wireless devices t hat are allowed or denied access t o
t he VDSL Rout er.
Rem ove
Select ent ries and click t he Re m ove but t on t o delet e t hem .
Add
Click t his t o add a new MAC address ent ry t o t he t able.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
183
Chapter 14 Wireless
14.4.1 The MAC Filter Add Screen
Use t his screen t o add MAC address ent ries. Click W ir e le ss > M AC Filt e r > Add t o open t he
following screen.
Figure 77 Wireless > MAC Filt er > Add
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 68 Wireless > MAC Filt er > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Address
Ent er t he MAC address of t he wireless device t hat is t o be allowed or denied access t o t he
VDSL Rout er. Ent er t he MAC addresses in a valid MAC address form at , t hat is, six hexadecim al
charact er pairs, for exam ple, 12: 34: 56: 78: 9a: bc.
Save/ Apply
Click t his but t on t o save t he changes and have t he VDSL Rout er st art using t hem .
14.5 The Advanced Screen
Click W ir e le ss > Adva nce d t o configure advanced wireless set t ings. See Sect ion 14.7.2 on page
188 for det ailed definit ions of t he t erm s list ed in t his screen.
Figure 78 Wireless: Advanced
184
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 69 Wireless: Advanced
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Channel
Set t he channel depending on your part icular region.
Select a channel or use Au t o t o have t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically det erm ine a channel
t o use. Changing t he channel m ay help resolve wireless int erference issues. Use a channel
as m any channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The VDSL
Rout er’s current channel num ber displays next t o t his field.
802.11n/ EWC
Select Aut o t o have t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically use I EEE 802.11n t o connect I EEE
802.11n client s. Disable t his t o not use I EEE 802.11n.
Bandw idt h
This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n / EW C t o Au t o.
Select whet her t he VDSL Rout er uses a wireless channel widt h of 2 0 M H z or 4 0 M H z.
A st andard 20MHz channel offers t ransfer speeds of up t o 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz
channel uses t wo st andard channels and offers speeds of up t o 300 Mbps.
40MHz ( channel bonding or dual channel) bonds t wo adj acent radio channels t o increase
t hroughput . The wireless client s m ust also support 40 MHz. I t is oft en bet t er t o use t he 20
MHz set t ing in a locat ion where t he environm ent hinders t he wireless signal.
Select 2 0 M H z if you want t o lessen radio int erference wit h ot her wireless devices in your
neighborhood or t he wireless client s do not support channel bonding.
Cont rol
Sideband
This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n / EW C t o Au t o.
802.11n
Prot ect ion
This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n / EW C t o Au t o. Select Au t o t o have t he wireless
devices t ransm it dat a aft er a RTS/ CTS handshake t o help prevent collisions in m ixed- m ode
net works ( net works wit h bot h I EEE 802.11n and I EEE 802.11g or I EEE 802.11b t raffic) .
This is available for som e regions when you select a specific channel and set t he Bandwidt h
field t o 4 0 M H z . Set whet her t he cont rol channel ( set in t he Ch a n n e l field) should be in t he
Low e r or Uppe r range of channel bands.
Select Off t o disable 802.11n prot ect ion. This can increase t hroughput in an I EEE 802.11nonly environm ent alt hough it m ay reduce t ransm ission rat es if your net work also has I EEE
802.11G and I EEE 802.11B client s.
Mult icast Rat e
Select a t ransm ission speed for wireless m ult icast t raffic.
Fragm ent at ion
Threshold
This is t he m axim um dat a fragm ent size t hat can be sent . Ent er a value bet ween 256 and
2346.
RTS Threshold
Dat a wit h it s fram e size larger t han t his value will perform t he RTS ( Request To Send) / CTS
( Clear To Send) handshake.
Ent er a value bet ween 0 and 2347.
54g™ Mode
This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n / EW C t o D isa ble d.
Select 5 4 g Au t o t o allow bot h I EEE 802.11G and I EEE 802.11B client s t o connect .
Select 5 4 G Pe r for m a n ce for t he best perform ance wit h I EEE 802.11G- cert ified client s.
Select 5 4 G LRS ( Lim it ed Rat e Support ) t o allow older I EEE 802.11B client s wit h 3- Bit
m essage headers t o connect . Only use t his if none of t he ot her m odes work.
Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b On ly if all your wireless client s only support I EEE 802.11B.
54g™ Prot ect ion
This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n / EW C t o D isa ble d. Select Au t o t o have t he wireless
devices t ransm it dat a aft er a RTS/ CTS handshake t o help prevent collisions in m ixed- m ode
net works ( net works wit h bot h I EEE 802.11g and I EEE 802.11b t raffic) .
Select Off t o disable 802.11g prot ect ion. Only select t his if you only connect I EEE 802.11G
client s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
185
Chapter 14 Wireless
Table 69 Wireless: Advanced ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Pream ble Type
This displays when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 n / EW C t o D isa ble d and 5 4 g™ M ode t o 5 4 g Au t o or
8 0 2 .1 1 b On ly. Select a pream ble t ype from t he drop- down list box. Choices are Lon g or
Sh or t . See Sect ion 14.7.6 on page 192 for m ore inform at ion.
Transm it Power
Set t he out put power of t he VDSL Rout er. I f t here is a high densit y of APs in an area,
decrease t he out put power t o reduce int erference wit h ot her APs. Select one of t he
following: 2 0 % , 4 0 % , 6 0 % , 8 0 % or 1 0 0 % .
Apply/ Save
Click t his t o save your changes t o t he VDSL Rout er.
14.6 Wireless Station Info
The st at ion m onit or displays t he connect ion st at us of t he wireless client s connect ed t o ( or t rying t o
connect t o) t he VDSL Rout er. To open t he st at ion m onit or, click W ir e le ss > St a t ion I nfo. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 79 Wireless > St at ion I nfo
The following t able describes t he labels in t his m enu.
Table 70 Wireless > St at ion I nfo
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC
This displays t he MAC address ( in XX: XX: XX: XX: XX: XX form at ) of a connect ed
wireless st at ion.
Associat ed
This is t he t im e t hat t he w ireless client associat ed wit h t he VDSL Rout er.
Aut horized
This is t he t im e t hat t he wireless client ’s connect ion t o t he VDSL Rout er was
aut horized.
SSI D
This is t he nam e of t he wireless net work on t he VDSL Rout er t o which t he wireless
client is connect ed.
I nt erface
This is t he nam e of t he wireless LAN int erface on t he VDSL Rout er t o which t he
wireless client is connect ed.
Refresh
Click t his but t on t o updat e t he inform at ion in t he screen.
14.7 Technical Reference
This sect ion discusses wireless LANs in m ore dept h.
14.7.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless net works consist of wireless client s, access point s and bridges.
186
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
• A wireless client is a radio connect ed t o a user ’s com put er.
• An access point is a radio wit h a wired connect ion t o a net work, which can connect wit h
num erous wireless client s and let t hem access t he net work.
• A bridge is a radio t hat relays com m unicat ions bet ween access point s and wireless client s,
ext ending a net work’s range.
Tradit ionally, a wireless net work operat es in one of t wo ways.
• An “ infrast ruct ure” t ype of net work has one or m ore access point s and one or m ore wireless
client s. The wireless client s connect t o t he access point s.
• An “ ad- hoc” t ype of net work is one in which t here is no access point . Wireless client s connect t o
one anot her in order t o exchange inform at ion.
The following figure provides an exam ple of a wireless net work.
Figure 80 Exam ple of a Wireless Net work
The wireless net work is t he part in t he blue circle. I n t his wireless net work, devices A and B use t he
access point ( AP) t o int eract wit h t he ot her devices ( such as t he print er) or wit h t he I nt ernet . Your
VDSL Rout er is t he AP.
Every wireless net work m ust follow t hese basic guidelines.
• Every device in t he sam e wireless net work m ust use t he sam e SSI D.
The SSI D is t he nam e of t he wireless net work. I t st ands for Service Set I Dent ifier.
• I f t wo wireless net works overlap, t hey should use a different channel.
Like radio st at ions or t elevision channels, each wireless net work uses a specific channel, or
frequency, t o send and receive inform at ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
187
Chapter 14 Wireless
• Every device in t he sam e wireless net work m ust use securit y com pat ible wit h t he AP.
Securit y st ops unaut horized devices from using t he wireless net work. I t can also prot ect t he
inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless net work.
Radio Channels
I n t he radio spect rum , t here are cert ain frequency bands allocat ed for unlicensed, civilian use. For
t he purposes of wireless net working, t hese bands are divided int o num erous channels. This allows a
variet y of net works t o exist in t he sam e place wit hout int erfering wit h one anot her. When you
creat e a net work, you m ust select a channel t o use.
Since t he available unlicensed spect rum varies from one count ry t o anot her, t he num ber of
available channels also varies.
14.7.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following t able describes som e wireless net work t erm s and acronym s used in t he VDSL Rout er’s
Web Configurat or.
Table 71 Addit ional Wireless Term s
TERM
DESCRIPTION
RTS/ CTS Threshold
I n a wireless net work which covers a large area, wireless devices are som et im es not
aware of each ot her ’s presence. This m ay cause t hem t o send inform at ion t o t he AP
at t he sam e t im e and result in inform at ion colliding and not get t ing t hrough.
By set t ing t his value lower t han t he default value, t he wireless devices m ust
som et im es get perm ission t o send inform at ion t o t he VDSL Rout er. The lower t he
value, t he m ore oft en t he devices m ust get perm ission.
I f t his value is great er t han t he fragm ent at ion t hreshold value ( see below) , t hen
wireless devices never have t o get perm ission t o send inform at ion t o t he VDSL
Rout er.
Pream ble
A pream ble affect s t he t im ing in your wireless net work. There are t wo pream ble
m odes: long and short . I f a device uses a different pream ble m ode t han t he VDSL
Rout er does, it cannot com m unicat e wit h t he VDSL Rout er.
Aut hent icat ion
The process of verifying whet her a wireless device is allowed t o use t he wireless
net work.
Fragm ent at ion
Threshold
A sm all fragm ent at ion t hreshold is recom m ended for busy net works, while a larger
t hreshold provides fast er perform ance if t he net work is not very busy.
14.7.3 Wireless Security Overview
By t heir nat ure, radio com m unicat ions are sim ple t o int ercept . For wireless dat a net works, t his
m eans t hat anyone wit hin range of a wireless net work wit hout securit y can not only read t he dat a
passing over t he airwaves, but also j oin t he net work. Once an unaut horized person has access t o
t he net work, he or she can st eal inform at ion or int roduce m alware ( m alicious soft ware) int ended t o
com prom ise t he net work. For t hese reasons, a variet y of securit y syst em s have been developed t o
ensure t hat only aut horized people can use a wireless dat a net work, or underst and t he dat a carried
on it .
These securit y st andards do t wo t hings. First , t hey aut hent icat e. This m eans t hat only people
present ing t he right credent ials ( oft en a usernam e and password, or a “ key” phrase) can access t he
net work. Second, t hey encrypt . This m eans t hat t he inform at ion sent over t he air is encoded. Only
188
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
people wit h t he code key can underst and t he inform at ion, and only people who have been
aut hent icat ed are given t he code key.
These securit y st andards vary in effect iveness. Som e can be broken, such as t he old Wired
Equivalent Prot ocol ( WEP) . Using WEP is bet t er t han using no securit y at all, but it will not keep a
det erm ined at t acker out . Ot her securit y st andards are secure in t hem selves but can be broken if a
user does not use t hem properly. For exam ple, t he WPA- PSK securit y st andard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an at t acker ’s soft ware t o guess - for exam ple, a t went y- let t er
long st ring of apparent ly random num bers and let t ers - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy t o guess - for exam ple, a t hree- let t er word from t he dict ionary.
Because of t he dam age t hat can be done by a m alicious at t acker, it ’s not j ust people who have
sensit ive inform at ion on t heir net work who should use securit y. Everybody who uses any wireless
net work should ensure t hat effect ive securit y is in place.
A good way t o com e up wit h effect ive securit y keys, passwords and so on is t o use obscure
inform at ion t hat you personally will easily rem em ber, and t o ent er it in a way t hat appears random
and does not include real words. For exam ple, if your m ot her owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorit e m ovie is Vanishing Point ( which you know was m ade in 1971) you could use
“ 70dodchal71vanpoi” as your securit y key.
The following sect ions int roduce different t ypes of wireless securit y you can set up in t he wireless
net work.
14.7.3.1 SSID
Norm ally, t he VDSL Rout er act s like a beacon and regularly broadcast s t he SSI D in t he area. You
can hide t he SSI D inst ead, in which case t he VDSL Rout er does not broadcast t he SSI D. I n addit ion,
you should change t he default SSI D t o som et hing t hat is difficult t o guess.
This t ype of securit y is fairly weak, however, because t here are ways for unaut horized wireless
devices t o get t he SSI D. I n addit ion, unaut horized wireless devices can st ill see t he inform at ion t hat
is sent in t he wireless net work.
14.7.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device t hat can use a wireless net work has a unique ident ificat ion num ber, called a MAC
address. 1 A MAC address is usually writ t en using t welve hexadecim al charact ers2 ; for exam ple,
00A0C5000002 or 00: A0: C5: 00: 00: 02. To get t he MAC address for each device in t he wireless
net work, see t he device’s User ’s Guide or ot her docum ent at ion.
You can use t he MAC address filt er t o t ell t he VDSL Rout er which devices are allowed or not allowed
t o use t he wireless net work. I f a device is allowed t o use t he wireless net work, it st ill has t o have
t he correct inform at ion ( SSI D, channel, and securit y) . I f a device is not allowed t o use t he wireless
net work, it does not m at t er if it has t he correct inform at ion.
This t ype of securit y does not prot ect t he inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless net work.
Furt herm ore, t here are ways for unaut horized wireless devices t o get t he MAC address of an
aut horized device. Then, t hey can use t hat MAC address t o use t he wireless net work.
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
189
Chapter 14 Wireless
14.7.3.3 User Authentication
Aut hent icat ion is t he process of verifying whet her a wireless device is allowed t o use t he wireless
net work. You can m ake every user log in t o t he wireless net work before using it . However, every
device in t he wireless net work has t o support I EEE 802.1x t o do t his.
For wireless net works, you can st ore t he user nam es and passwords for each user in a RADI US
server. This is a server used in businesses m ore t han in hom es. I f you do not have a RADI US server,
you cannot set up user nam es and passwords for your users.
Unaut horized wireless devices can st ill see t he inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless net work,
even if t hey cannot use t he wireless net work. Furt herm ore, t here are ways for unaut horized
wireless users t o get a valid user nam e and password. Then, t hey can use t hat user nam e and
password t o use t he wireless net work.
14.7.3.4 Encryption
Wireless net works can use encrypt ion t o prot ect t he inform at ion t hat is sent in t he wireless
net work. Encrypt ion is like a secret code. I f you do not know t he secret code, you cannot
underst and t he m essage.
The t ypes of encrypt ion you can choose depend on t he t ype of aut hent icat ion. ( See Sect ion
14.7.3.3 on page 190 for inform at ion about t his.)
Table 72 Types of Encrypt ion for Each Type of Aut hent icat ion
W e a k e st
NO AUTHENTICATION
RADIUS SERVER
No Securit y
WPA
St at ic WEP
WPA- PSK
St r on ge st
WPA2- PSK
WPA2
For exam ple, if t he wireless net work has a RADI US server, you can choose W PA or W PA2 . I f users
do not log in t o t he wireless net work, you can choose no encrypt ion, St a t ic W EP, W PA- PSK, or
W PA2 - PSK.
Usually, you should set up t he st rongest encrypt ion t hat every device in t he wireless net work
support s. For exam ple, suppose you have a wireless net work wit h t he VDSL Rout er and you do not
have a RADI US server. Therefore, t here is no aut hent icat ion. Suppose t he wireless net work has t wo
devices. Device A only support s WEP, and device B support s WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up St a t ic W EP in t he wireless net work.
Not e: I t is recom m ended t hat w ireless net works use W PA- PSK, W PA, or st ronger
encrypt ion. The ot her t ypes of encrypt ion are bet t er t han none at all, but it is st ill
possible for unaut hor ized w ireless devices t o figure out t he original inform at ion
pret t y quickly.
When you select W PA2 or W PA2 - PSK in your VDSL Rout er, you can also select an opt ion ( W PA
com pa t ible ) t o support WPA as well. I n t his case, if som e of t he devices support WPA and som e
support WPA2, you should set up W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 ( depending on t he t ype of wireless net work
login) and select t he W PA com pa t ible opt ion in t he VDSL Rout er.
190
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
Many t ypes of encrypt ion use a key t o prot ect t he inform at ion in t he wireless net work. The longer
t he key, t he st ronger t he encrypt ion. Every device in t he wireless net work m ust have t he sam e key.
14.7.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless net works are radio net works, t heir signals are subj ect t o lim it at ions of dist ance,
int erference and absorpt ion.
Problem s wit h dist ance occur when t he t wo radios are t oo far apart . Problem s wit h int erference
occur when ot her radio waves int errupt t he dat a signal. I nt erference m ay com e from ot her radio
t ransm issions, such as m ilit ary or air t raffic cont rol com m unicat ions, or from m achines t hat are
coincident al em it t ers such as elect ric m ot ors or m icrowaves. Problem s wit h absorpt ion occur when
physical obj ect s ( such as t hick walls) are bet ween t he t wo radios, m uffling t he signal.
14.7.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set ( BSS) exist s when all com m unicat ions bet ween wireless st at ions or bet ween a
wireless st at ion and a wired net work client go t hrough one access point ( AP) .
I nt ra- BSS t raffic is t raffic bet ween wireless st at ions in t he BSS. When I nt ra- BSS t raffic blocking is
disabled, wireless st at ion A and B can access t he wired net work and com m unicat e wit h each ot her.
When I nt ra- BSS t raffic blocking is enabled, wireless st at ion A and B can st ill access t he wired
net work but cannot com m unicat e wit h each ot her.
Figure 81 Basic Service set
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
191
Chapter 14 Wireless
14.7.6 Preamble Type
Pream ble is used t o signal t hat dat a is com ing t o t he receiver. Short and long refer t o t he lengt h of
t he synchronizat ion field in a packet .
Short pream ble increases perform ance as less t im e sending pream ble m eans m ore t im e for sending
dat a. All I EEE 802.11 com pliant wireless adapt ers support long pream ble, but not all support short
pream ble.
Use long pream ble if you are unsure what pream ble m ode ot her wireless devices on t he net work
support , and t o provide m ore reliable com m unicat ions in busy wireless net works.
Use short pream ble if you are sure all wireless devices on t he net work support it , and t o provide
m ore efficient com m unicat ions.
Use t he dynam ic set t ing t o aut om at ically use short pream ble when all wireless devices on t he
net work support it , ot herwise t he VDSL Rout er uses long pream ble.
Not e: The wireless devices MUST use t he sam e pream ble m ode in order t o com m unicat e.
14.7.7 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your VDSL Rout er support s WiFi Prot ect ed Set up ( WPS) , which is an easy way t o set up a secure
wireless net work. WPS is an indust ry st andard specificat ion, defined by t he WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you t o quickly set up a wireless net work wit h st rong securit y, wit hout having t o
configure securit y set t ings m anually. Each WPS connect ion works bet ween t wo devices. Bot h
devices m ust support WPS ( check each device’s docum ent at ion t o m ake sure) .
Depending on t he devices you have, you can eit her press a but t on ( on t he device it self, or in it s
configurat ion ut ilit y) or ent er a PI N ( a unique Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber t hat allows one device
t o aut hent icat e t he ot her) in each of t he t wo devices. When WPS is act ivat ed on a device, it has t wo
m inut es t o find anot her device t hat also has WPS act ivat ed. Then, t he t wo devices connect and set
up a secure net work by t hem selves.
14.7.7.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push But t on Configurat ion ( PBC) is init iat ed by pressing a but t on on each WPS- enabled
device, and allowing t hem t o connect aut om at ically. You do not need t o ent er any inform at ion.
Not every WPS- enabled device has a physical WPS but t on. Som e m ay have a WPS PBC but t on in
t heir configurat ion ut ilit ies inst ead of or in addit ion t o t he physical but t on.
Take t he following st eps t o set up WPS using t he but t on.
192
Ensure t hat t he t wo devices you want t o set up are wit hin wireless range of one anot her.
Look for a WPS but t on on each device. I f t he device does not have one, log int o it s configurat ion
ut ilit y and locat e t he but t on ( see t he device’s User ’s Guide for how t o do t his - for t he VDSL Rout er,
see Sect ion 14.5 on page 184) .
Press t he but t on on one of t he devices ( it doesn’t m at t er which) . For t he VDSL Rout er you m ust
press t he W ifi but t on for 10 seconds.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
Wit hin t wo m inut es, press t he but t on on t he ot her device. The regist rar sends t he net work nam e
( SSI D) and securit y key t hrough an secure connect ion t o t he enrollee.
I f you need t o m ake sure t hat WPS worked, check t he list of associat ed wireless client s in t he AP’s
configurat ion ut ilit y. I f you see t he wireless client in t he list , WPS was successful.
14.7.7.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS- enabled device has it s own PI N ( Personal I dent ificat ion Num ber) . This m ay eit her be
st at ic ( it cannot be changed) or dynam ic ( in som e devices you can generat e a new PI N by clicking
on a but t on in t he configurat ion int erface) .
Use t he PI N m et hod inst ead of t he push- but t on configurat ion ( PBC) m et hod if you want t o ensure
t hat t he connect ion is est ablished bet ween t he devices you specify, not j ust t he first t wo devices t o
act ivat e WPS in range of each ot her. However, you need t o log int o t he configurat ion int erfaces of
bot h devices t o use t he PI N m et hod.
When you use t he PI N m et hod, you m ust ent er t he PI N from one device ( usually t he wireless client )
int o t he second device ( usually t he Access Point or wireless rout er) . Then, when WPS is act ivat ed
on t he first device, it present s it s PI N t o t he second device. I f t he PI N m at ches, one device sends
t he net work and securit y inform at ion t o t he ot her, allowing it t o j oin t he net work.
Take t he following st eps t o set up a WPS connection bet ween an access point or wireless rout er
( referred t o here as t he AP) and a client device using t he PI N m et hod.
Ensure WPS is enabled on bot h devices.
Access t he WPS sect ion of t he AP’s configurat ion int erface. See t he device’s User ’s Guide for how t o
do t his.
Look for t he client ’s WPS PI N; it will be displayed eit her on t he device, or in t he WPS sect ion of t he
client ’s configurat ion int erface ( see t he device’s User ’s Guide for how t o find t he WPS PI N - for t he
VDSL Rout er, see Sect ion 14.3 on page 179) .
Ent er t he client ’s PI N in t he AP’s configurat ion int erface.
I f t he client device’s configurat ion int erface has an area for ent ering anot her device’s PI N, you can
eit her ent er t he client ’s PI N in t he AP, or ent er t he AP’s PI N in t he client - it does not m at t er which.
St art WPS on bot h devices wit hin t wo m inut es.
Use t he configurat ion ut ilit y t o act ivat e WPS, not t he push- but t on on t he device it self.
On a com put er connect ed t o t he wireless client , t ry t o connect t o t he I nt ernet . I f you can connect ,
WPS was successful.
I f you cannot connect , check t he list of associat ed wireless client s in t he AP’s configurat ion ut ilit y. I f
you see t he wireless client in t he list , WPS was successful.
The following figure shows a WPS- enabled wireless client ( inst alled in a not ebook com put er)
connect ing t o t he WPS- enabled AP via t he PI N m et hod.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
193
Chapter 14 Wireless
Figure 82 Exam ple WPS Process: PI N Met hod
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
from other device:
WPS
START
WPS
START
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
14.7.7.3 How WPS Works
When t wo WPS- enabled devices connect , each device m ust assum e a specific role. One device act s
as t he regist rar ( t he device t hat supplies net work and securit y set t ings) and t he ot her device act s
as t he enrollee ( t he device t hat receives net work and securit y set t ings. The regist rar creat es a
secure EAP ( Ext ensible Aut hent icat ion Prot ocol) t unnel and sends t he net work nam e ( SSI D) and t he
WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK pre- shared key t o t he enrollee. Whet her WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK is used
depends on t he st andards support ed by t he devices. I f t he regist rar is already part of a net work, it
sends t he exist ing inform at ion. I f not , it generat es t he SSI D and WPA( 2) - PSK random ly.
The following figure shows a WPS- enabled client ( inst alled in a not ebook com put er) connect ing t o a
WPS- enabled access point .
194
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
Figure 83 How WPS works
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of regist rar and enrollee last only as long as t he WPS set up process is act ive ( t wo
m inut es) . The next t im e you use WPS, a different device can be t he regist rar if necessary.
The WPS connect ion process is like a handshake; only t wo devices part icipat e in each WPS
t ransact ion. I f you want t o add m ore devices you should repeat t he process wit h one of t he exist ing
net worked devices and t he new device.
Not e t hat t he access point ( AP) is not always t he regist rar, and t he wireless client is not always t he
enrollee. All WPS- cert ified APs can be a regist rar, and so can som e WPS- enabled wireless client s.
By default , a WPS devices is “ unconfigured”. This m eans t hat it is not part of an exist ing net work
and can act as eit her enrollee or regist rar ( if it support s bot h funct ions) . I f t he regist rar is
unconfigured, t he securit y set t ings it t ransm it s t o t he enrollee are random ly- generat ed. Once a
WPS- enabled device has connect ed t o anot her device using WPS, it becom es “ configured”. A
configured wireless client can st ill act as enrollee or regist rar in subsequent WPS connect ions, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. I t will be t he regist rar in all subsequent WPS
connect ions in which it is involved. I f you want a configured AP t o act as an enrollee, you m ust reset
it t o it s fact ory default s.
14.7.7.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This sect ion shows how securit y set t ings are dist ribut ed in an exam ple WPS set up.
The following figure shows an exam ple net work. I n st ep 1 , bot h AP1 and Clie nt 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is act ivat ed on bot h, t hey perform t he handshake. I n t his exam ple, AP1
is t he regist rar, and Clie nt 1 is t he enrollee. The regist rar random ly generat es t he securit y
inform at ion t o set up t he net work, since it is unconfigured and has no exist ing inform at ion.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
195
Chapter 14 Wireless
Figure 84 WPS: Exam ple Net work St ep 1
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
AP1
CLIENT 1
I n st ep 2 , you add anot her wireless client t o t he net work. You know t hat Clie nt 1 support s regist rar
m ode, but it is bet t er t o use AP1 for t he WPS handshake wit h t he new client since you m ust
connect t o t he access point anyway in order t o use t he net work. I n t his case, AP1 m ust be t he
regist rar, since it is configured ( it already has securit y inform at ion for t he net work) . AP1 supplies
t he exist ing securit y inform at ion t o Clie nt 2 .
Figure 85 WPS: Exam ple Net work St ep 2
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
AP1
CLIENT 1
ENROLLEE
NF
YI
CU
SE
CLIENT 2
I n st ep 3, you add anot her access point ( AP2 ) t o your net work. AP2 is out of range of AP1 , so you
cannot use AP1 for t he WPS handshake wit h t he new access point . However, you know t hat Clie nt
2 support s t he regist rar funct ion, so you use it t o perform t he WPS handshake inst ead.
196
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
Figure 86 WPS: Exam ple Net work St ep 3
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1
IS
EX
GC
TIN
ION
CT
NN
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
SE
CU
RIT
ENROLLEE
INF
AP2
14.7.7.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has som e lim it at ions of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in I nfrast ruct ure net works only ( where an AP and a wireless client com m unicat e) . I t
does not work in Ad- Hoc net works ( where t here is no AP) .
• When you use WPS, it works bet ween t wo devices only. You cannot enroll m ult iple devices
sim ult aneously, you m ust enroll one aft er t he ot her.
For inst ance, if you have t wo enrollees and one regist rar you m ust set up t he first enrollee ( by
pressing t he WPS but t on on t he regist rar and t he first enrollee, for exam ple) , t hen check t hat it
successfully enrolled, t hen set up t he second device in t he sam e way.
• WPS works only wit h ot her WPS- enabled devices. However, you can st ill add non-WPS devices t o
a net work you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by aut om at ically issuing a random ly- generat ed WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK pre- shared
key from t he regist rar device t o t he enrollee devices. Whet her t he net work uses WPA- PSK or
WPA2- PSK depends on t he device. You can check t he configurat ion int erface of t he regist rar
device t o discover t he key t he net work is using ( if t he device support s t his feat ure) . Then, you
can ent er t he key int o t he non-WPS device and j oin t he net work as norm al ( t he non-WPS device
m ust also support WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK) .
• When you use t he PBC m et hod, t here is a short period ( from t he m om ent you press t he but t on
on one device t o t he m om ent you press t he but t on on t he ot her device) when any WPS- enabled
device could j oin t he net work. This is because t he regist rar has no way of ident ifying t he
“ correct ” enrollee, and cannot different iat e bet ween your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker t o gain access t o a net work.
You can easily check t o see if t his has happened. WPS works bet ween only t wo devices
sim ult aneously, so if anot her device has enrolled your device will be unable t o enroll, and will not
have access t o t he net work. I f t his happens, open t he access point ’s configurat ion int erface and
look at t he list of associat ed client s ( usually displayed by MAC address) . I t does not m at t er if t he
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
197
Chapter 14 Wireless
access point is t he WPS regist rar, t he enrollee, or was not involved in t he WPS handshake; a
rogue device m ust st ill associat e wit h t he access point t o gain access t o t he net work. Check t he
MAC addresses of your wireless client s ( usually print ed on a label on t he bot t om of t he device) . I f
t here is an unknown MAC address you can rem ove it or reset t he AP.
14.7.8 Vista as a WPS External Registrar
Use an Et hernet cable t o connect a Windows Vist a com put er direct ly t o one of t he VDSL Rout er’s
Et hernet port s t o let t he com put er give wireless set t ings t o t he VDSL Rout er and t hen lat er t o
wireless client s using t he WPS PI N m et hod.
Figure 87 Windows Vist a Com put er Connect ed t o a VDSL Rout er Et hernet Port
14.7.8.1 Vista Configuring the VDSL Router’s Wireless Settings
Go t o t he VDSL Rout er’s W ir e le ss > Se cur it y screen and copy t he VDSL Rout er’s ident ificat ion
PI N.
I n Windows Vist a, go t o your net work connect ions and double- click t he ZyXEL AP icon t o open t he
Windows Connect Now ( WCN) screens.
Ent er t he VDSL Rout er’s ident ificat ion PI N and click N e x t . The com put er t ells t he VDSL Rout er what
wireless net work set t ings t o use.
14.7.8.2 Vista Adding and Authenticating Wireless Clients
Aft er a Windows Vist a com put er configures t he VDSL Rout er’s wireless set t ings, t he sam e com put er
can use WPS t o add wireless client s t o t he net work. The com put er also aut hent icat es t hem when
t hey connect t o t he wireless net work.
I n t he wireless client ’s configurat ion ut ilit y, select t he opt ion t o use it s PI N t o add it t o t he wireless
net work.
Not e: Aft er t he wireless client st art s WPS configurat ion, you have t w o m inut es t o ent er
t he PI N in t he Windows Vist a com put er.
198
I n t he Windows Vist a net work connect ions, an icon for t he wireless client displays. Double- click it ,
ent er t he wireless client ’s PI N, and click N e x t .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Wireless
The Windows Vist a com put er uses WPS t o give t he wireless client t he wireless net work’s set t ings.
Aft er t he wireless client ’s wireless set t ings are configured, t he Windows Vist a com put er
aut hent icat es t hem whenever t hey connect t o t he wireless net work.
Aft er t he WPS process finishes ( t he enrollee is able t o access t he VDSL Rout er) you can repeat
t hese st eps t o add m ore wireless client s one at a t im e.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
199
Chapter 14 Wireless
200
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HA PT E R
15
Voice
15.1 Overview
Use t his chapt er t o:
• Connect an analog phone t o t he VDSL Rout er.
• Make phone calls over t he I nt ernet , as well as t he regular phone net work.
• Configure set t ings such as speed dial.
• Configure net work set t ings t o opt im ize t he voice qualit y of your phone calls.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
These scr eens allow you t o configure your VDSL Rout er t o m ake phone calls over
t he I nt ernet and your regular phone line, and t o set up t he phones you connect t o
t he VDSL Rout er.
• Use t he SI P Accou n t screen ( Sect ion 15.3 on page 203) t o set up inform at ion
about your SI P account , cont rol w hich SI P account s t he phones connect ed t o
t he VDSL Rout er use and configure audio set t ings such as volum e levels for t he
phones connect ed t o t he ZyXEL Device.
• Use t he SI P Se r v ice Pr ovide r screen ( Sect ion 15.4 on page 209) t o configure
t he SI P server inform at ion, QoS for VoI P calls, t he num ber s for cert ain phone
funct ions, and dialing plan.
• Use t he Re gion scr een ( Sect ion 15.5 on page 216) t o change set t ings t hat
depend on t he count r y you are in.
• Use t he Ca ll Rule screen ( Sect ion 15.6 on page 217) t o set up short cut s for
dialing frequent ly- used ( VoI P) phone num bers.
• Use t he Su m m a r y screen ( Sect ion 15.7 on page 219) t o view t he sum m ary list
of received, dialed and m issed calls.
• Use t he Ou t going screen ( Sect ion 15.8 on page 219) t o view det ailed
inform at ion for each out going call you m ade.
• Use t he I n com in g screen ( Sect ion 15.9 on page 220) t o view det ailed
inform at ion for each incom ing call from som eone calling you.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
201
Chapter 15 Voice
You don’t necessarily need t o use all t hese screens t o set up your account . I n fact ,
if your service provider did not supply inform at ion on a part icular field in a screen,
it is usually best t o leave it at it s default set t ing.
15.1.2 What You Need to Know About VoIP
VoIP
VoI P st ands for Voice over I P. I P is t he I nt ernet Prot ocol, which is t he m essagecarrying st andard t he I nt ernet runs on. So, Voice over I P is t he sending of voice
signals ( speech) over t he I nt ernet ( or anot her net w ork t hat uses t he I nt ernet
Prot ocol) .
SIP
SI P st ands for Session I nit iat ion Prot ocol. SI P is a signalling st andard t hat let s one
net work device ( like a com put er or t he VDSL Rout er) send m essages t o anot her.
I n VoI P, t hese m essages are about phone calls over t he net work. For exam ple,
when you dial a num ber on your VDSL Rout er, it sends a SI P m essage over t he
net work asking t he ot her device ( t he num ber you dialed) t o t ake par t in t he call.
SIP Accounts
A SI P account is a t ype of VoI P account . I t is an ar rangem ent w it h a service
provider t hat let s you m ake phone calls over t he I nt ernet . When you set t he VDSL
Rout er t o use your SI P account t o m ake calls, t he VDSL Rout er is able t o send all
t he inform at ion about t he phone call t o your service provider on t he I nt er net .
St rict ly speaking, you don’t need a SI P account . I t is possible for one SI P device
( like t he VDSL Rout er) t o call anot her wit hout involving a SI P service provider.
However, t he net wor king difficult ies involved in doing t his m ake it t rem endously
im pract ical under norm al circum st ances. Your SI P account provider rem oves t hese
difficult ies by t aking care of t he call rout ing and set up - figuring out how t o get
your call t o t he right place in a way t hat you and t he ot her person can t alk t o one
anot her.
How to Find Out More
See Chapt er 2 on page 19 for a t ut orial showing how t o set up t hese screens in an
exam ple scenario.
See Sect ion 15.10 on page 221 for advanced t echnical inform at ion on SI P.
202
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
15.2 Before You Begin
• Before you can use t hese screens, you need t o have a VoI P account already set
up. I f you don’t have one yet , you can sign up w it h a VoI P service pr ovider over
t he I nt ernet .
• You should have t he inform at ion your VoI P service provider gave you ready,
before you st art t o configure t he VDSL Rout er.
15.3 The SIP Settings Screen
The VDSL Rout er uses a SI P account t o m ake out going VoI P calls and check if an
incom ing call’s dest inat ion num ber m at ches your SI P account ’s SI P num ber. I n
order t o m ake or receive a VoI P call, you need t o enable and configure a SI P
account , and m ap it t o a phone port . The SI P account cont ains inform at ion t hat
allows your VDSL Rout er t o connect t o your VoI P service provider.
Use t his screen t o m aint ain inform at ion about each SI P account . You can also
enable and disable each SI P account . To access t his screen, click VOI P > SI P >
SI P Accou n t .
Figure 88 VOIP > SIP > SIP Account
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
203
Chapter 15 Voice
204
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 73 VOIP > SIP > SIP Account
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service
Provider
Select ion
Select t he SI P service provider profile you want t o use for t he SI P
account you configure in t his screen. I f you change t his field, t he screen
aut om at ically refreshes.
SI P Account
Select ion
Select t he SI P account you want t o see in t his screen. I f you change t his
field, t he screen aut om at ically refreshes.
Select AD D _ N EW t o creat e a new SI P account on t he VDSL Rout er.
Delet e
Click t his but t on t o rem ove t he SI P account select ed in t he SI P
Account Se le ct ion field.
This but t on is not available when you select AD D _ N EW in t he SI P
Account Se le ct ion field.
General
Enable SI P
Account
Select t his if you want t he VDSL Rout er t o use t his account . Clear it if
you do not want t he VDSL Rout er t o use t his account .
SI P Account
Num ber
Ent er your SI P num ber. I n t he full SI P URI , t his is t he part before t he @
sym bol. You can use up t o 127 print able ASCI I charact ers.
Aut hent icat ion
User Nam e
Ent er t he user nam e for regist ering t his SI P account , exact ly as it was
given t o you. You can use up t o 95 print able ASCI I charact ers.
Password
Ent er t he user nam e for regist ering t his SI P account , exact ly as it was
given t o you. You can use up t o 95 print able ASCI I Ext ended set
charact ers.
Apply To Phone
Select a phone port on which you want t o m ake or receive phone calls
for t his SI P account .
I f you m ap a phone port t o m ore t han one SI P account , t here is no way
t o dist inguish bet ween t he SI P account s when you receive phone calls.
The VDSL Rout er uses t he m ost recent ly regist ered SI P account first
when you m ake an out going call.
I f a phone port is not m apped t o a SI P account , you cannot receive or
m ake any calls on t he phone connect ed t o t his phone port .
Advanced/ Basic
Click Adva nce d t o display and edit m ore inform at ion for t he SI P
account . Click Ba sic t o display and configure t he basic SI P account
set t ings.
URI Type
Select whet her or not t o include t he SI P service dom ain nam e when t he
VDSL Rout er sends t he SI P num ber.
SI P - include t he SI P service dom ain nam e.
TEL - do not include t he SI P service dom ain nam e.
Voice Feat ures
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
205
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 73 VOIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Prim ary
Com pression
Type
Select t he t ype of voice coder/ decoder ( codec) t hat you want t he VDSL
Rout er t o use.
Secondary
Com pression
Type
Third
Com pression
Type
G.711 provides high voice qualit y but requires m ore bandwidt h ( 64
kbps) . G.711 is t he default codec used by phone com panies and digit al
handset s.
•
•
G.7 1 1 a is t ypically used in Europe.
G.7 1 1 u is t ypically used in Nort h Am erica and Japan.
G.7 2 2 is a 7 KHz wideband voice codec t hat operat es at 48, 56 and 64
kbps. By using a sam ple rat e of 16 kHz, G.722 can provide higher
fidelit y and bet t er audio qualit y t han narrowband codecs like G.711, in
which t he voice signal is sam pled at 8 KHz.
G.7 2 6 operat es at 2 4 or 3 2 kbps.
The VDSL Rout er m ust use t he sam e codec as t he peer. When t wo SI P
devices st art a SI P session, t hey m ust agree on a codec.
Select t he VDSL Rout er’s first choice for voice coder/ decoder.
Select t he VDSL Rout er’s second choice for voice coder/ decoder. Select
N on e if you only want t he VDSL Rout er t o accept t he first choice.
Select t he VDSL Rout er’s t hird choice for voice coder/ decoder. Select
N on e if you only want t he VDSL Rout er t o accept t he first or second
choice.
Speaking
Volum e Cont rol
Ent er t he loudness t hat t he VDSL Rout er uses for speech t hat it sends
t o t he peer device.
M inim um is t he quiet est , and M a x im um is t he loudest .
List ening
Volum e Cont rol
Ent er t he loudness t hat t he VDSL Rout er uses for speech t hat it receives
from t he peer device.
M inim um is t he quiet est , and M a x im um is t he loudest .
Enable G.168
( Echo
Cancellat ion)
Select t his if you want t o elim inat e t he echo caused by t he sound of
your voice reverberat ing in t he t elephone receiver while you t alk.
Enable VAD
( Voice Act ive
Det ect or)
Select t his if t he VDSL Rout er should st op t ransm it t ing when you are
not speaking. This reduces t he bandwidt h t he VDSL Rout er uses.
Call Feat ures
206
Send Caller I D
Select t his if you want t o send ident ificat ion when you m ake VoI P phone
calls. Clear t his if you do not want t o send ident ificat ion.
Enable Call
Transfer
Select t his t o enable call t ransfer on t he VDSL Rout er. This allows you t o
t ransfer an incom ing call ( t hat you have answered) t o anot her phone.
Enable Call
Wait ing
Select t his t o enable call wait ing on t he VDSL Rout er. This allows you t o
place a call on hold while you answer anot her incom ing call on t he sam e
t elephone num ber.
Call Wait ing
Rej ect Tim er
Specify a t im e of seconds t hat t he VDSL Rout er wait s before rej ect ing
t he second call if you do not answer it .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 73 VOIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enable
Uncondit ional
Forward
Select t his if you want t he VDSL Rout er t o forward all incom ing calls t o
t he specified phone num ber.
Enable Busy
Forward
Select t his if you want t he VDSL Rout er t o forward incom ing calls t o t he
specified phone num ber if t he phone port is busy.
Specify t he phone num ber in t he To N um be r field on t he right .
Specify t he phone num ber in t he To N um be r field on t he right .
I f you have call wait ing, t he incom ing call is forwarded t o t he specified
phone num ber if you rej ect or ignore t he second incom ing call.
Enable No
Answer Forward
Select t his if you want t he VDSL Rout er t o forward incom ing calls t o t he
specified phone num ber if t he call is unanswered. ( See N o An sw e r
Tim e .)
Specify t he phone num ber in t he To N um be r field on t he right .
No Answer
Tim e
This field is used by t he Act ive N o Answ e r For w a r d feat ure.
Enable Do Not
Dist urb
Select t his t o set your phone t o not ring when som eone calls you.
Enable Call
Com plet ion on
Busy Subscriber
( CCBS)
When you m ake a phone call but hear a busy t one, Call Com plet ion on
Busy Subscriber ( CCBS) allows you t o enable aut o- callback by pressing
5 and hanging up t he phone. The VDSL Rout er t hen t ries t o call t hat
phone num ber every m inut e since aft er you hang up t he phone. When
t he called part y becom es available wit hin t he CCBS t im eout period ( 60
m inut es by default ) , bot h phones ring.
Ent er t he num ber of seconds t he VDSL Rout er should wait for you t o
answer an incom ing call before it considers t he call is unanswered.
•
•
•
I f t he called part y’s phone rings because of CCBS but no one
answers t he phone aft er 180 seconds, you will hear a busy t one.
You can enable CCBS on t he called num ber again.
I f you m anually call t he num ber on which you have enabled CCBS
before t he CCBS t im eout period expires, t he VDSL Rout er disables
CCBS on t he called num ber.
I f you call a second num ber before t he first called num ber ’s CCBS
t im eout period expires, t he VDSL Rout er st ops calling t he first
num ber unt il you finish t he second call.
Select t his opt ion t o act ivat e CCBS on t he VDSL Rout er.
MWI ( Message
Wait ing
I ndicat ion)
Select t his if you want t o hear a wait ing ( beeping) dial t one on your
phone when you have at least one voice m essage. Your VoI P service
provider m ust support t his feat ure.
Expirat ion Tim e
Keep t he default value for t his field, unless your VoI P service provider
t ells you t o change it . Ent er t he num ber of seconds t he SI P server
should provide t he m essage wait ing service each t im e t he VDSL Rout er
subscribes t o t he service. Before t his t im e passes, t he VDSL Rout er
aut om at ically subscribes again.
Hot Line /
Warm Line
Enable
Select t his t o enable t he hot line or warm line feat ure on t he VDSL
Rout er.
Warm Line
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er dial t he specified warm line num ber
aft er you pick up t he t elephone and do not press any keys on t he
keypad for a period of t im e.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
207
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 73 VOIP > SIP > SIP Account (continued)
LABEL
Hot Line
208
DESCRIPTION
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er dial t he specified hot line num ber
im m ediat ely when you pick up t he t elephone.
Hot Line /
Warm Line
num ber
Ent er t he num ber of t he hot line or warm line t hat you want t he VDSL
Rout er t o dial.
Warm Line
Tim er
Ent er a num ber of seconds t hat t he VDSL Rout er wait s before dialing
t he warm line num ber if you pick up t he t elephone and do not press any
keys on t he keypad.
Apply
Click t his t o save your changes and t o apply t hem t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Cancel
Click t his t o set every field in t his screen t o it s last- saved value.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
15.4 The SIP Service Provider Screen
Click V OI P > SI P > SI P Se r v ice Pr ovide r t o open t he SI P Se r vice Pr ovide r
scr een. Use t his screen t o configure t he SI P server inform at ion, QoS for VoI P calls,
t he num bers for cert ain phone funct ions, and dialing plan.
Figure 89 VOIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
209
Chapter 15 Voice
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 74 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service
Provider
Select ion
Select t he SI P service provider profile you want t o see in t his screen. I f
you change t his field, t he screen aut om at ically refreshes.
Delet e
Select AD D _ N EW t o creat e a new SI P service provider profile on t he
VDSL Rout er.
Click t his but t on t o rem ove t he SI P service provider profile select ed in
t he Se r vice Pr ovide r Se le ct ion field.
This but t on is not available when you select AD D _ N EW in t he Se r vice
Pr ovide r Se le ct ion .
210
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 74 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
SI P Service
Provider Nam e
Ent er a descript ive nam e of up t o 63 print able charact ers for t his SI P
service provider profile. Spaces are not allowed.
SI P Local Port
Ent er t he VDSL Rout er’s list ening port num ber, if your VoI P service
provider gave you one. Ot herwise, keep t he default value.
SI P Server
Address
Ent er t he I P address or dom ain nam e of t he SI P server provided by
your VoI P service provider. You can use up t o 95 print able ASCI I
charact ers. I t does not m at t er whet her t he SI P server is a proxy,
redirect or regist er server.
SI P Server Port
Ent er t he SI P server ’s list ening port num ber, if your VoI P service
provider gave you one. Ot herwise, keep t he default value.
REGI STER
Server Address
Ent er t he I P address or dom ain nam e of t he SI P regist er server, if your
VoI P service provider gave you one. Ot herwise, ent er t he sam e address
you ent ered in t he SI P Se r ve r Addr e ss field. You can use up t o 95
print able ASCI I charact ers.
REGI STER
Server Port
Ent er t he SI P regist er server ’s list ening port num ber, if your VoI P
service provider gave you one. Ot herwise, ent er t he sam e port num ber
you ent ered in t he SI P Se r ve r Por t field.
SI P Service
Dom ain
Ent er t he SI P service dom ain nam e. I n t he full SI P URI , t his is t he part
aft er t he @ sym bol. You can use up t o 127 print able ASCI I Ext ended
set charact ers.
RFC support
Support
Locat ing SI P
Server ( RFC
3263)
Select t his opt ion t o have t he VDSL Rout er use DNS procedures t o
resolve t he SI P dom ain and find t he SI P server ’s I P address, port
num ber and support ed t ransport prot ocol( s) .
The VDSL Rout er first uses DNS Nam e Aut horit y Point er ( NAPTR)
records t o det erm ine t he t ransport prot ocols support ed by t he SI P
server. I t t hen perform s DNS Service ( SRV) query t o det erm ine t he port
num ber for t he prot ocol. The VDSL Rout er resolves t he SI P server ’s I P
address by a st andard DNS address record lookup.
The SI P Se r ve r Por t and REGI STER Se r ve r Por t fields are grayed
out and not applicable and t he Tr a n spor t Type can also be set t o
AUTO if you select t his opt ion.
RFC 3262
RFC 3262 defines a m echanism t o provide reliable t ransm ission of SI P
provisional response m essages, which convey inform at ion on t he
processing progress of t he request . This uses t he opt ion t ag 100rel and
t he Provisional Response ACKnowledgem ent ( PRACK) m et hod.
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er include a SI P Require/ Support ed
header field wit h t he opt ion t ag 100rel in all I NVI TE request s. When
t he VDSL Rout er receives a SI P response m essage indicat ing t hat t he
phone it called is ringing, t he VDSL Rout er sends a PRACK m essage t o
have bot h sides confirm t he m essage is received.
I f you select t his opt ion, t he peer device should also support t he opt ion
t ag 100rel t o send provisional responses reliably.
VoI P I OP Flags
Use t his sect ion t o m odify t he header or som e inform at ion in SI P
m essages in order t o resolve int eroperabilit y issues wit h som e SI P
servers.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
211
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 74 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
23’ in SI P
m essages
Replace a dial digit “ # ” wit h “ % 23” in t he I NVI TE m essages.
Rem ove ‘: 5060’
and
't ransport = udp'
from requesturi in SI P
m essages
Rem ove “ : 5060” and “ t ransport = udp” from t he “ Request- URI ” st ring in
t he REGI STER and I NVI TE packet s.
Rem ove t he
'Rout e' header
in SI P
m essages
Rem ove t he 'Rout e' header in SI P packet s.
Don't send reI nvit e t o t he
rem ot e part y
when t here are
m ult iple codecs
answered in t he
SDP
Do not send a re- I nvit e packet t o t he rem ot e part y when t he rem ot e
part y answers t hat it can support m ult iple codecs??
Bound I nt erface
Nam e
Bound I nt erface
Nam e
I f you select LAN or Any_ W AN , t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically
act ivat es t he VoI P service when any LAN or WAN connect ion is up.
I f you select M ult i_ W AN , you also need t o select t he pre- configured
WAN connect ions. The VoI P service is act ivat ed only when one of t he
select ed WAN connect ions is up.
Out bound Proxy
Out bound Proxy
Address
Ent er t he I P address or dom ain nam e of t he SI P out bound proxy server
if your VoI P service provider has a SI P out bound server t o handle voice
calls. This allows t he VDSL Rout er t o work wit h any t ype of NAT rout er
and elim inat es t he need for STUN or a SI P ALG. Turn off any SI P ALG on
a NAT rout er in front of t he VDSL Rout er t o keep it from re- t ranslat ing
t he I P address ( since t his is already handled by t he out bound proxy
server) .
Out bound Proxy
Port
Ent er t he SI P out bound proxy server ’s list ening port , if your VoI P
service provider gave you one. Ot herwise, keep t he default value.
RTP Port Range
St art Port
End Port
Ent er t he list ening port num ber( s) for RTP t raffic, if your VoI P service
provider gave you t his inform at ion. Ot herwise, keep t he default values.
To ent er one port num ber, ent er t he port num ber in t he St a r t Por t and
End Por t fields.
To ent er a range of port s,
•
•
ent er t he port num ber at t he beginning of t he range in t he St a r t
Por t field.
ent er t he port num ber at t he end of t he range in t he En d Por t field.
DTMF Mode
212
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 74 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DTMF Mode
Cont rol how t he VDSL Rout er handles t he t ones t hat your t elephone
m akes when you push it s but t ons. You should use t he sam e m ode your
VoI P service provider uses.
RFC2 8 3 3 - send t he DTMF t ones in RTP packet s.
I n Ba n d - send t he DTMF t ones in t he voice dat a st ream . This m et hod
works best when you are using a codec t hat does not use com pression
( like G.711) . Codecs t hat use com pression ( like G.729 and G.726) can
dist ort t he t ones.
SI PI nfo - send t he DTMF t ones in SI P m essages.
Transport Type
Transport Type
Select t he t ransport layer prot ocol ( TCP, UD P or TLS) used for SI P.
AUTO is available when you select t he Suppor t Loca t ing SI P Se r ve r
opt ion. I f you select AUTO here, t he VDSL Rout er sends a DNS Nam e
Aut horit y Point er ( NAPTR) query t o locat e t he SI P server and get t he
support ed t ransport layer prot ocol( s) .
FAX Opt ion
This field cont rols how t he VDSL Rout er handles fax m essages.
G.711 Fax
Passt hrough
Select t his if t he VDSL Rout er should use G.711 t o send fax m essages.
The peer devices m ust also use G.711.
T.38 Fax Relay
Select t his if t he VDSL Rout er should send fax m essages as UDP or TCP/
I P packet s t hrough I P net works. This provides bet t er qualit y, but it m ay
have int er- operabilit y problem s. The peer devices m ust also use T.38.
QoS Tag
SI P DSCP Mark
Set t ing
Ent er t he DSCP ( DiffServ Code Point ) num ber for SI P voice
t ransm issions. The VDSL Rout er creat es Class of Service ( CoS) priorit y
t ags wit h t his num ber t o voice t raffic t hat it t ransm it s.
RTP DSCP Mark
Set t ing
Ent er t he DSCP ( DiffServ Code Point ) num ber for RTP voice
t ransm issions. The VDSL Rout er creat es Class of Service ( CoS) priorit y
t ags wit h t his num ber t o RTP t raffic t hat it t ransm it s.
Tim er Set t ing
Expirat ion
Durat ion
Ent er t he num ber of seconds your SI P account is regist ered wit h t he
SI P regist er server before it is delet ed. The VDSL Rout er aut om at ically
t ries t o re- regist er your SI P account when one- half of t his t im e has
passed. ( The SI P regist er server m ight have a different expirat ion.)
Regist er Resend t im er
Ent er t he num ber of seconds t he VDSL Rout er wait s before it t ries again
t o regist er t he SI P account , if t he first t ry failed or if t here is no
response.
Session Expires
Ent er t he num ber of seconds t he VDSL Rout er let s a SI P session rem ain
idle ( wit hout t raffic) before it aut om at ically disconnect s t he session.
Min- SE
Ent er t he m inim um num ber of seconds t he VDSL Rout er let s a SI P
session rem ain idle ( wit hout t raffic) before it aut om at ically disconnect s
t he session. When t wo SI P devices st art a SI P session, t hey m ust agree
on an expirat ion t im e for idle sessions. This field is t he short est
expirat ion t im e t hat t he VDSL Rout er accept s.
Phone Key
Config
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
213
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 74 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Call Ret urn
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o place a call t o t he
last num ber t hat called you.
One Shot Caller
Display Call
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o act ivat e caller I D for
t he next call only.
One Shot Caller
Hidden Call
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o deact ivat e caller I D
for t he next call only.
One Shot Call
Wait ing Enable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o put a call on hold
when you are answering anot her.
Call Wait ing
Disable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o t urn t he call wait ing
funct ion off.
I nt ernal Call
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o call t he phone( s)
connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Call Transfer
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o t ransfer a call t o
anot her phone.
Uncondit ional
Call Forward
Enable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o forward all incom ing
calls t o t he phone num ber you specified in t he SI P > SI P Accou n t
screen.
Uncondit ional
Call Forward
Disable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o t urn t he
uncondit ional call forward funct ion off.
No Answer Call
Forward Enable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o forward incom ing
calls t o t he phone num ber you specified in t he SI P > SI P Accou n t
screen if t he calls are unanswered.
No Answer Call Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o t urn t he no answer
Forward Disable call forward funct ion off.
214
Call Forward
When Busy
Enable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o forward incom ing
calls t o t he phone num ber you specified in t he SI P > SI P Accou n t
screen if t he phone port is busy.
Call Forward
When Busy
Disable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o t urn t he busy
forward funct ion off.
One Shot Call
Wait ing Enable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o act ivat e call wait ing
on t he next call only.
One Shot Call
Wait ing Disable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o deact ivat e call
wait ing on t he next call only.
Do Not Dist urb
Enable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o set your phone not
t o ring when som eone calls you.
Do Not Dist urb
Disable
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o t urn t his funct ion
off.
Call Com plet ion
on Busy
Subscriber
( CCBS)
Deact ivat e
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o disable CCBS on a
call.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 74 VoIP > SIP > SIP Service Provider (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Out going SI P
Specify t he key com binat ions t hat you can ent er t o select t he SI P
account t hat you use t o m ake out going calls.
I f you ent er # 12( by default ) < SI P account index num ber> # < t he phone
num ber you want t o call> , # 1201# 12345678 for exam ple, t he VDSL
Rout er uses t he first SI P account t o call 12345678.
Dial Plan
Dial Plan Enable
Select t his t o act ivat e t he dial plan rules you specify in t he t ext box
provided. See Sect ion 15.4.1 on page 215 for how t o set up a rule.
Dialing I nt erval
Select ion
Dialing I nt erval
Select ion
Ent er t he num ber of seconds t he VDSL Rout er should wait aft er you
st op dialing num bers before it m akes t he phone call. The value depends
on how quickly you dial phone num bers.
I f you select I m m e dia t e D ia l Ena ble , you can press t he pound key
( # ) t o t ell t he VDSL Rout er t o m ake t he phone call im m ediat ely,
regardless of t his set t ing.
I m m ediat e Dial
Enable
I m m ediat e Dial
Enable
Select t his if you want t o use t he pound key ( # ) t o t ell t he VDSL Rout er
t o m ake t he phone call im m ediat ely, inst ead of wait ing t he num ber of
seconds you select ed in t he D ia ling I nt e r va l Se le ct ion field.
I f you select t his, dial t he phone num ber, and t hen press t he pound key.
The VDSL Rout er m akes t he call im m ediat ely, inst ead of wait ing. You
can st ill wait , if you want .
Apply
Click t his t o save your changes and t o apply t hem t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Cancel
Click t his t o set every field in t his screen t o it s last- saved value.
15.4.1 Dial Plan Rules
A dial plan defines t he dialing pat t erns, such as t he lengt h and range of t he digit s
for a t elephone num ber. I t also includes count ry codes, access codes, area codes,
local num bers, long dist ance num bers or int ernat ional call prefixes. For exam ple,
t he dial plan ( [ 2- 9] xxxxxx) does not allow a local num ber which begins wit h 1 or
0.
Wit hout a dial plan, users have t o m anually ent er t he whole callee’s num ber and
wait for t he specified dialing int erval t o t im e out or press a t erm inat or key ( usually
t he pound key on t he phone keypad) before t he VDSL Rout er m akes t he call.
The VDSL Rout er init ializes a call when t he dialed num ber m at ches any one of t he
rules in t he dial plan. Dial plan rules follow t hese convent ions:
• The collect ion of rules is in parent heses ( ) .
• Rules are separat ed by t he | ( bar) sym bol.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
215
Chapter 15 Voice
• “ x” st ands for a wildcard and can be any digit from 0 t o 9.
• A subset of keys is in a square bracket [ ] . Ranges are allowed.
For exam ple, [ 359] m eans a num ber m at ching t his rule can be 3, 5 or 9. [ 268* ] m eans a num ber m at ching t his rule can be 2, 6, 7, 8 or * .
• The dot “ .” appended t o a digit allows t he digit t o be ignored or repeat ed
m ult iple t im es. Any digit ( 0~ 9, * , # ) aft er t he dot will be ignored.
For exam ple, ( 01.) m eans a num ber m at ching t his rule can be 0, 01, 0111,
01111, and so on.
• < dialed- num ber: t ranslat ed- num ber> indicat es t he num ber aft er t he colon
replaces t he num ber before t he colon in an angle bracket < > . For exam ple,
( < : 1212> xxxxxxx) m eans t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically prefixes t he
t ranslat ed- num ber “ 1212” t o t he num ber you dialed before m aking t he call. This
can be used for local calls in t he US.
( < 9: > xxx xxxxxxx) m eans t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically rem oves t he
specified prefix “ 9” from t he num ber you dialed before m aking t he call. This is
always used for m aking out side calls fr om an office.
( xx< 123: 456> xxxx) m eans t he VDSL Rout er aut om at ically t ranslat es “ 123” t o
“ 456” in t he num ber you dialed before m aking t he call.
• Calls wit h a num ber followed by t he exclam at ion m ark “ !” will be dropped.
• Calls wit h a num ber followed by t he t erm inat ion charact er “ @” will be m ade
im m ediat ely. Any digit ( 0~ 9, * , # ) aft er t he @ charact er will be ignored.
I n t his exam ple dial plan ( 0 | [ 49] 11 | 1 [ 2- 9] xx xxxxxxx | 1 947 xxxxxxx ! ) , you
can dial “ 0” t o call t he local operat or, call 411 or 911, or m ake a long dist ance call
wit h an area code st art ing from 2 t o 9 in t he US. The calls wit h t he area code 947
will be dropped.
15.5 The Phone Region Screen
Use t his screen t o m aint ain set t ings t hat depend on w hich region of t he wor ld t he
VDSL Rout er is in. To access t his scr een, click VoI P > Ph on e > Re gion .
Figure 90 VoIP > Phone > Region
216
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 75 VoIP > Phone > Region
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Region Set t ings
Select t he place in which t he VDSL Rout er is locat ed.
Call Service
Mode
Select t he m ode for supplem ent ary phone services ( call hold, call
wait ing, call t ransfer and t hree- way conference calls) t hat your VoI P
service provider support s.
Eu r ope Type - use supplem ent ary phone services in European m ode
USA Type - use supplem ent ary phone services Am erican m ode
You m ight have t o subscribe t o t hese services t o use t hem . Cont act your
VoI P service provider.
Apply
Click t his t o save your changes and t o apply t hem t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Cancel
Click t his t o set every field in t his screen t o it s last- saved value.
15.6 The Call Rule Screen
Use t his screen t o add, edit , or rem ove speed- dial num bers for out going calls.
Speed dial provides short cut s for dialing frequent ly- used ( VoI P) phone num bers.
You also have t o creat e speed- dial ent ries if you want t o call SI P num bers t hat
cont ain let t ers. Once you have configured a speed dial rule, you can use a short cut
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
217
Chapter 15 Voice
( t he speed dial num ber, # 01 for exam ple) on your phone's keypad t o call t he
phone num ber.
Figure 91 VoIP > Call Rule
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 76 VoIP > Call Rule
218
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Speed Dial
Use t his sect ion t o creat e or edit speed- dial ent ries.
Select t he speed- dial num ber you want t o use for t his phone num ber.
Num ber
Ent er t he SI P num ber you want t he VDSL Rout er t o call when you dial
t he speed- dial num ber.
Descript ion
Ent er a nam e t o ident ify t he part y you call when you dial t he speed- dial
num ber. You can use up t o 127 print able ASCI I charact ers.
Add
Click t his t o use t he inform at ion in t he Spe e d D ia l sect ion t o updat e
t he Ph one Book sect ion.
Phone Book
Use t his sect ion t o look at all t he speed- dial ent ries and t o erase t hem .
This field displays t he speed- dial num ber you should dial t o use t his
ent ry.
Num ber
This field displays t he SI P num ber t he VDSL Rout er calls when you dial
t he speed- dial num ber.
Descript ion
This field displays t he nam e of t he part y you call when you dial t he
speed- dial num ber.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 76 VoIP > Call Rule
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Modify
Use t his field t o edit or erase t he speed- dial ent ry.
Click t he Edit icon t o copy t he inform at ion for t his speed- dial ent ry int o
t he Spe e d D ia l sect ion, where you can change it .
Click t he D e le t e icon t o erase t his speed- dial ent ry.
Clear
Click t his t o erase all t he speed- dial ent ries.
15.7 Call History Summary Screen
The VDSL Rout er logs calls from or t o your SI P num bers. This scr een allows you t o
view t he sum m ary of received, dialed and m issed calls.
Click V OI P > Ca ll H ist or y > Su m m a r y. The following screen displays.
Figure 92 VOIP > Call History > Summary
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 77 VOIP > Call History > Call History Summary
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Click t his but t on t o renew t he call hist ory list .
Clear All
Click t his but t on t o rem ove all ent ries from t he call hist ory list .
No.
This is a read- only index num ber.
Dat e
This is t he dat e when t he calls were m ade.
Tot al Calls
This displays t he t ot al num ber of calls from or t o your SI P num bers t hat
day.
Out going Calls
This displays how m any calls originat ed from you t hat day.
I ncom ing Calls
This displays how m any calls you received t hat day.
Missing Calls
This displays how m any incom ing calls were not answered t hat day.
Tot al Durat ion
This displays how long all calls last ed t hat day.
15.8 Outgoing Calls Screen
Use t his screen t o see det ailed inform at ion for each out going call you m ade.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
219
Chapter 15 Voice
Click V OI P > Ca ll H ist or y > Ou t goin g. The following screen displays.
Figure 93 VOIP > Call History > Outgoing
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 78 VOIP > Call History > Outgoing
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Click t his but t on t o renew t he dialed call list .
Clear All
Click t his but t on t o rem ove all ent ries from t he dialed call list .
No.
This is a read- only index num ber.
t im e
This is t he dat e and t im e when t he call was m ade.
phone port
This is t he phone port on which you m ade t he call.
phone num ber
This is t he SI P num ber you called.
durat ion
This displays how long t he call last ed.
15.9 Incoming Calls Screen
Use t his screen t o see det ailed inform at ion for each incom ing call from som eone
calling you.
Click V OI P > Ca ll H ist or y > I n com in g Ca lls. The following screen displays.
Figure 94 VOIP > Call History > Incoming Calls
Each field is described in t he following t able.
Table 79 VOIP > Call History > Incoming
220
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Click t his but t on t o renew t he received call list .
Clear All
Click t his but t on t o rem ove all ent ries from t he received call list .
No.
This is a read- only index num ber.
t im e
This is t he dat e and t im e when t he call was m ade.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Table 79 VOIP > Call History > Incoming
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
phone port
This is t he phone port on which you received t he call.
M isse d m eans t he call was unanswered.
phone num ber
This is t he SI P num ber t hat called you.
durat ion
This displays how long t he call last ed.
15.10 Technical Reference
This sect ion cont ains background m at erial relevant t o t he VoI P screens.
VoIP
VoI P is t he sending of voice signals over I nt ernet Prot ocol. This allow s you t o
m ake phone calls and send faxes over t he I nt ernet at a fract ion of t he cost of
using t he t radit ional circuit- swit ched t elephone net work. You can also use servers
t o run t elephone service applicat ions like PBX ser vices and voice m ail. I nt ernet
Telephony Ser vice Provider ( I TSP) com panies provide VoI P service.
Circuit- sw it ched t elephone net works requir e 64 kilobit s per second ( Kbps) in each
direct ion t o handle a t elephone call. VoI P can use advanced voice coding
t echniques wit h com pression t o reduce t he required bandwidt h.
SIP
The Session I nit iat ion Prot ocol ( SI P) is an applicat ion- layer cont rol ( signaling)
prot ocol t hat handles t he set t ing up, alt ering and t earing down of voice and
m ult im edia sessions over t he I nt ernet .
SI P signaling is separat e from t he m edia for which it handles sessions. The m edia
t hat is exchanged during t he session can use a different pat h fr om t hat of t he
signaling. SI P handles t elephone calls and can int erface wit h t radit ional circuitswit ched t elephone net works.
SIP Identities
A SI P account uses an ident it y ( som et im es refer red t o as a SI P address) . A
com plet e SI P ident it y is called a SI P URI ( Uniform Resource I dent ifier) . A SI P
account 's URI ident ifies t he SI P account in a way sim ilar t o t he way an e- m ail
address ident ifies an e- m ail account . The form at of a SI P ident it y is SI PNum ber@SI P- Ser vice- Dom ain.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
221
Chapter 15 Voice
SIP Number
The SI P num ber is t he part of t he SI P URI t hat com es before t he “ @” sym bol. A
SI P num ber can use let t er s like in an e- m ail addr ess ( j ohndoe@your- I TSP.com for
exam ple) or num bers like a t elephone num ber ( 1122334455@VoI P- provider.com
for exam ple) .
SIP Service Domain
The SI P service dom ain of t he VoI P service pr ovider is t he dom ain nam e in a SI P
URI . For exam ple, if t he SI P addr ess is 1122334455@VoI P- provider.com , t hen
“ VoI P- provider.com ” is t he SI P service dom ain.
SIP Registration
Each VDSL Rout er is an individual SI P User Agent ( UA) . To provide voice service, it
has a public I P address for SI P and RTP prot ocols t o com m unicat e wit h ot her
servers.
A SI P user agent has t o regist er wit h t he SI P regist rar and m ust provide
inform at ion about t he users it represent s, as well as it s current I P addr ess ( for t he
rout ing of incom ing SI P request s) . Aft er successful regist rat ion, t he SI P server
knows t hat t he users ( ident ified by t heir dedicat ed SI P URI s) are represent ed by
t he UA, and knows t he I P address t o which t he SI P request s and responses should
be sent .
Regist rat ion is init iat ed by t he User Agent Client ( UAC) running in t he VoI P
gat eway ( t he VDSL Rout er) . The gat eway m ust be configured wit h inform at ion
let t ing it know where t o send t he REGI STER m essage, as well as t he relevant user
and aut horizat ion dat a.
A SI P regist rat ion has a lim it ed lifespan. The User Agent Client m ust renew it s
regist rat ion wit hin t his lifespan. I f it does not do so, t he regist rat ion dat a will be
delet ed from t he SI P regist rar's dat abase and t he connect ion broken.
The VDSL Rout er at t em pt s t o regist er all enabled subscr iber port s when it is
swit ched on. When you enable a subscriber port t hat was pr eviously disabled, t he
VDSL Rout er at t em pt s t o regist er t he port im m ediat ely.
Authorization Requirements
SI P regist rat ions ( and subsequent SI P request s) require a usernam e and
passw ord for aut horizat ion. These credent ials are validat ed via a challenge /
response syst em using t he HTTP digest m echanism ( as det ailed in RFC3261, " SI P:
Session I nit iat ion Prot ocol" ) .
222
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
SIP Servers
SI P is a client- server prot ocol. A SI P client is an applicat ion program or device t hat
sends SI P request s. A SI P server responds t o t he SI P request s.
When you use SI P t o m ake a VoI P call, it originat es at a client and t erm inat es at a
server. A SI P client could be a com put er or a SI P phone. One device can act as
bot h a SI P client and a SI P server.
SIP User Agent
A SI P user agent can m ake and receive VoI P t elephone calls. This m eans t hat SI P
can be used for peer- t o- peer com m unicat ions even t hough it is a client - server
prot ocol. I n t he following figure, eit her A or B can act as a SI P user agent client t o
init iat e a call. A and B can also bot h act as a SI P user agent t o receive t he call.
Figure 95 SIP User Agent
SIP Proxy Server
A SI P proxy server receives request s from client s and forwards t hem t o anot her
server.
I n t he following exam ple, you want t o use client device A t o call som eone w ho is
using client device C.
The client device ( A in t he figure) sends a call invit at ion t o t he SI P proxy server
( B) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
223
Chapter 15 Voice
The SI P proxy server forwards t he call invit at ion t o C.
Figure 96 SIP Proxy Server
SIP Redirect Server
A SI P redirect server accept s SI P request s, t ranslat es t he dest inat ion address t o
an I P address and sends t he t ranslat ed I P address back t o t he device t hat sent t he
request . Then t he client device t hat originally sent t he request can send request s
t o t he I P address t hat it received back from t he redirect server. Redirect servers
do not init iat e SI P request s.
I n t he following exam ple, you want t o use client device A t o call som eone w ho is
using client device C.
224
Client device A sends a call invit at ion for C t o t he SI P redirect server ( B) .
The SI P redirect server sends t he invit at ion back t o A wit h C’s I P address ( or
dom ain nam e) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Client device A t hen sends t he call invit at ion t o client device C.
Figure 97 SIP Redirect Server
SIP Register Server
A SI P regist er server m aint ains a dat abase of SI P ident it y- t o- I P address ( or
dom ain nam e) m apping. The regist er server checks your user nam e and password
when you regist er.
RTP
When you m ake a VoI P call using SI P, t he RTP ( Real t im e Transport Prot ocol) is
used t o handle voice dat a t ransfer. See RFC 1889 for det ails on RTP.
Pulse Code Modulation
Pulse Code Modulat ion ( PCM) m easures analog signal am plit udes at regular t im e
int ervals and convert s t hem int o bit s.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
225
Chapter 15 Voice
SIP Call Progression
The following figure displays t he basic st eps in t he set up and t ear down of a SI P
call. A calls B.
Table 80 SIP Call Progression
1. I NVI TE
2. Ringing
3. OK
4. ACK
5.Dialogue ( voice
t raffic)
6. BYE
7. OK
A sends a SI P I NVI TE request t o B. This m essage is an invit at ion for B t o
part icipat e in a SI P t elephone call.
B sends a response indicat ing t hat t he t elephone is ringing.
B sends an OK response aft er t he call is answ ered.
A t hen sends an ACK m essage t o acknowledge t hat B has answered t he call.
Now A and B exchange voice m edia ( t alk) .
Aft er t alking, A hangs up and sends a BYE request .
B replies wit h an OK response confirm ing receipt of t he BYE request and t he call is
t erm inat ed.
SIP Call Progression Through Proxy Servers
Usually, t he SI P UAC set s up a phone call by sending a request t o t he SI P proxy
server. Then, t he proxy server looks up t he dest inat ion t o which t he call should be
forwarded ( according t o t he URI request ed by t he SI P UAC) . The request m ay be
forwar ded t o m ore t han one proxy server before arriving at it s dest inat ion.
The response t o t he request goes t o all t he proxy servers t hrough w hich t he
request passed, in reverse sequence. Once t he session is set up, session t raffic is
sent bet w een t he UAs direct ly, bypassing all t he proxy servers in bet ween.
226
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
The following figure shows t he SI P and session t raffic flow bet ween t he user
agent s ( UA 1 and UA 2 ) and t he proxy servers ( t his exam ple shows t wo proxy
servers, PROX Y 1 and PROXY 2 ) .
Figure 98 SIP Call Through Proxy Servers
PROXY 1
PROXY 2
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP & RTP
UA 1
UA 2
The following t able shows t he SI P call progression.
Table 81 SIP Call Progression
UA 1
PROXY 1
PROXY 2
UA 2
I nvit e
I nvit e
100 Trying
I nvit e
100 Trying
180
Ringing
180
Ringing
180
Ringing
200 OK
200 OK
200 OK
ACK
RTP
RTP
BYE
200 OK
Use r Age n t 1 sends a SI P I NVI TE request t o Pr ox y 1 . This m essage is an
invit at ion t o Use r Age nt 2 t o part icipat e in a SI P t elephone call. Pr ox y 1 sends a
response indicat ing t hat it is t rying t o com plet e t he request .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
227
Chapter 15 Voice
Pr ox y 1 sends a SI P I NVI TE request t o Pr ox y 2 . Pr ox y 2 sends a response
indicat ing t hat it is t r ying t o com plet e t he request .
Pr ox y 2 sends a SI P I NVI TE request t o Use r Age n t 2 .
Use r Age n t 2 sends a response back t o Pr ox y 2 indicat ing t hat t he phone is
ringing. The response is relayed back t o Use r Age n t 1 via Pr ox y 1 .
Use r Age n t 2 sends an OK response t o Pr ox y 2 aft er t he call is answered. This is
also relayed back t o Use r Age nt 1 via Pr ox y 1 .
Use r Age n t 1 and Use r Age n t 2 exchange RTP packet s cont aining voice dat a
direct ly, wit hout involving t he proxies.
When Use r Age n t 2 hangs up, he sends a BYE r equest .
Use r Age n t 1 replies wit h an OK response confirm ing receipt of t he BYE request ,
and t he call is t erm inat ed.
Voice Coding
A codec ( coder/ decoder) codes analog voice signals int o digit al signals and
decodes t he digit al signals back int o analog voice signals. The VDSL Rout er
support s t he following codecs.
• G.711 is a Pulse Code Modulat ion ( PCM) wavefor m codec. PCM m easur es analog
signal am plit udes at regular t im e int ervals and convert s t hem int o digit al
sam ples. G.711 provides very good sound qualit y but requires 64 kbps of
bandwidt h.
• G.726 is an Adapt ive Different ial PCM ( ADPCM) waveform codec t hat uses a
lower bit rat e t han st andard PCM conversion. ADPCM convert s analog audio int o
digit al signals based on t he difference bet w een each audio sam ple and a
predict ion based on previous sam ples. The m ore sim ilar t he audio sam ple is t o
t he predict ion, t he less space needed t o describe it . G.726 operat es at 16, 24,
32 or 40 kbps.
• G.729 is an Analysis- by- Synt hesis ( AbS) hybrid waveform codec t hat uses a
filt er based on inform at ion about how t he hum an vocal t ract produces sounds.
G.729 provides good sound qualit y and reduces t he requir ed bandwidt h t o 8
kbps.
Voice Activity Detection/Silence Suppression
Voice Act ivit y Det ect ion ( VAD) det ect s whet her or not speech is present . This let s
t he VDSL Rout er reduce t he bandwidt h t hat a call uses by not t ransm it t ing “ silent
packet s” w hen you are not speaking.
228
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Comfort Noise Generation
When using VAD, t he VDSL Rout er generat es com fort noise when t he ot her part y
is not speaking. The com fort noise let s you know t hat t he line is st ill connect ed as
t ot al silence could easily be m ist aken for a lost connect ion.
Echo Cancellation
G.168 is an I TU-T st andard for elim inat ing t he echo caused by t he sound of your
voice reverberat ing in t he t elephone receiver while you t alk.
MWI (Message Waiting Indication)
Enable Message Wait ing I ndicat ion ( MWI ) enables your phone t o give you a
m essage–wait ing ( beeping) dial t one when you have a voice m essage( s) . Your
VoI P service provider m ust have a m essaging syst em t hat sends m essage wait ing
st at us SI P packet s as defined in RFC 3842.
Custom Tones (IVR)
I VR ( I nt eract ive Voice Response) is a feat ure t hat allows you t o use your
t elephone t o int eract wit h t he VDSL Rout er. The VDSL Rout er allows you t o record
cust om t ones for t he Ea r ly M e dia and M u sic On H old funct ions. The sam e
recordings apply t o bot h t he caller ringing and on hold t ones.
Table 82 Custom Tones Details
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Tot al Tim e for All Tones
900 seconds for all cust om t ones com bined
Maxim um Tim e per
I ndividual Tone
180 seconds
Tot al Num ber of Tones
Recordable
You can record up t o 5 different cust om t ones but t he t ot al
t im e m ust be 900 seconds or less.
Recording Custom Tones
Use t he following st eps if you would like t o creat e new t ones or change your
t ones:
Pick up t he phone and press “ * * * * ” on your phone’s keypad and wait for t he
m essage t hat says you are in t he configurat ion m enu.
Press a num ber from 1101~ 1105 on your phone followed by t he “ # ” key.
Play your desired m usic or voice recording int o t he receiver ’s m out hpiece. Press
t he “ # ” key.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
229
Chapter 15 Voice
You can cont inue t o add, list en t o, or delet e t ones, or you can hang up t he r eceiver
when you are done.
Listening to Custom Tones
Do t he following t o list en t o a cust om t one:
Pick up t he phone and press “ * * * * ” on your phone’s keypad and wait for t he
m essage t hat says you are in t he configurat ion m enu.
Press a num ber from 1201~ 1208 followed by t he “ # ” key t o list en t o t he t one.
You can cont inue t o add, list en t o, or delet e t ones, or you can hang up t he r eceiver
when you are done.
Deleting Custom Tones
Do t he following t o delet e a cust om t one:
Pick up t he phone and press “ * * * * ” on your phone’s keypad and wait for t he
m essage t hat says you are in t he configurat ion m enu.
Press a num ber from 1301~ 1308 followed by t he “ # ” key t o delet e t he t one of
your choice. Press 14 followed by t he “ # ” key if you wish t o clear all your cust om
t ones.
You can cont inue t o add, list en t o, or delet e t ones, or you can hang up t he r eceiver
when you are done.
15.10.1 Quality of Service (QoS)
Qualit y of Service ( QoS) refers t o bot h a net work's abilit y t o deliver dat a wit h
m inim um delay, and t he net working m et hods used t o provide bandwidt h for realt im e m ult im edia applicat ions.
Type of Service (ToS)
Net w ork t raffic can be classified by set t ing t he ToS ( Type of Service) values at t he
dat a sour ce ( for exam ple, at t he VDSL Rout er) so a server can decide t he best
m et hod of delivery, t hat is t he least cost , fast est rout e and so on.
DiffServ
DiffServ is a class of service ( CoS) m odel t hat m arks packet s so t hat t hey receive
specific per- hop t reat m ent at DiffServ- com pliant net work devices along t he rout e
based on t he applicat ion t ypes and t raffic flow. Packet s are m arked wit h DiffServ
230
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
Code Point s ( DSCP) indicat ing t he level of service desired. This allows t he
int erm ediary DiffServ- com pliant net w ork devices t o handle t he packet s different ly
depending on t he code point s wit hout t he need t o negot iat e pat hs or rem em ber
st at e inform at ion for every flow. I n addit ion, applicat ions do not have t o request a
part icular service or give advanced not ice of where t he t raffic is going. 3
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS ( Different iat ed Services) field t o replace t he Type of
Service ( TOS) field in t he I P header. The DS field cont ains a 2- bit unused field and
a 6- bit DSCP field which can define up t o 64 service levels. The following figure
illust rat es t he DS field.
DSCP is backward com pat ible wit h t he t hr ee precedence bit s in t he ToS oct et so
t hat non- DiffServ com pliant , ToS- enabled net work device w ill not conflict wit h t he
DSCP m apping.
Figure 99 DiffServ: Differentiated Service Field
DSCP
Unused
( 6- bit )
(2-bit)
The DSCP value det erm ines t he for warding behavior, t he PHB ( Per- Hop Behavior) ,
t hat each packet get s across t he DiffServ net work. Based on t he m arking rule,
different kinds of t raffic can be m arked for different priorit ies of forwarding.
Resources can t hen be allocat ed according t o t he DSCP values and t he configured
policies.
15.10.2 Phone Services Overview
Supplem ent ary services such as call hold, call wait ing, and call t ransfer. are
generally available from your VoI P service provider. The VDSL Rout er support s t he
following services:
• Call Hold
• Call Wait ing
• Making a Second Call
• Call Transfer
• Call Forwarding
• Three-Way Conference
• I nt ernal Calls
3.
The VDSL Router does not support DiffServ at the time of writing.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
231
Chapter 15 Voice
• Call Park and Pickup
• Do not Dist urb
Note: To take full advantage of the supplementary phone services available through
the VDSL Router's phone ports, you may need to subscribe to the services from
your VoIP service provider.
15.10.2.1 The Flash Key
Flashing m eans t o press t he hook for a short period of t im e ( a few hundred
m illiseconds) before releasing it . On newer t elephones, t here should be a " flash"
key ( but t on) t hat generat es t he signal elect ronically. I f t he flash key is not
available, you can t ap ( press and im m ediat ely release) t he hook by hand t o
achieve t he sam e effect . However, using t he flash key is preferred since t he t im ing
is m uch m ore precise. Wit h m anual t apping, if t he durat ion is t oo long, it m ay be
int erpret ed as hanging up by t he VDSL Rout er.
You can invoke all t he supplem ent ary services by using t he flash key.
15.10.2.2 Europe Type Supplementary Phone Services
This sect ion describes how t o use supplem ent ary phone services wit h t he Eu r ope
Ty pe Ca ll Se r vice M ode . Com m ands for supplem ent ary services are list ed in t he
t able below.
Aft er pressing t he flash key, if you do not issue t he sub- com m and before t he
default sub- com m and t im eout ( 2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid subcom m and, t he current operat ion will be abor t ed.
Table 83 European Flash Key Commands
SUBCOMMAND COMMAND
DESCRIPTION
Flash
Put a current call on hold t o place a second call.
Swit ch back t o t he call ( if t here is no second call) .
Flash
Drop t he call present ly on hold or rej ect an incom ing call
which is wait ing for answer.
Flash
Disconnect t he current phone connect ion and answer t he
incom ing call or resum e wit h caller present ly on hold.
Flash
1. Swit ch back and fort h bet ween t wo calls.
2. Put a current call on hold t o answer an incom ing call.
3. Separat e t he current t hree- way conference call int o
t wo individual calls ( one is on- line, t he ot her is on hold) .
232
Flash
Creat e t hree- way conference connect ion.
Flash
* 98#
Transfer t he call t o anot her phone.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
European Call Hold
Call hold allow s you t o put a call ( A) on hold by pressing t he flash key.
I f you have anot her call, press t he flash key and t hen “ 2” t o swit ch back and fort h
bet ween caller A and B by put t ing eit her one on hold.
Press t he flash key and t hen “ 0” t o disconnect t he call pr esent ly on hold and keep
t he current call on line.
Press t he flash key and t hen “ 1” t o disconnect t he current call and resum e t he call
on hold.
I f you hang up t he phone but a caller is st ill on hold, t here will be a rem ind ring.
European Call Waiting
This allow s you t o place a call on hold while you answer anot her incom ing call on
t he sam e t elephone ( direct ory) num ber.
I f t here is a second call t o a t elephone num ber, you will hear a call wait ing t one.
Take one of t he following act ions.
• Rej ect t he second call.
Press t he flash key and t hen press “ 0”.
• Disconnect t he first call and answ er t he second call.
Eit her press t he flash key and press “ 1”, or j ust hang up t he phone and t hen
answer t he phone aft er it rings.
• Put t he first call on hold and answ er t he second call.
Press t he flash key and t hen “ 2”.
European Call Transfer
Do t he following t o t ransfer an incom ing call ( t hat you have answ ered) t o anot her
phone.
Press t he flash key t o put t he caller on hold.
When you hear t he dial t one, dial “ * 98# ” followed by t he num ber t o which you
want t o t ransfer t he call.
Aft er you hear t he ring signal or t he second part y answers it , hang up t he phone.
European Three-Way Conference
Use t he following st eps t o m ake t hree- way conference calls.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
233
Chapter 15 Voice
When you are on t he phone t alking t o som eone, press t he flash key t o put t he
caller on hold and get a dial t one.
Dial a phone num ber direct ly t o m ake anot her call.
When t he second call is answ ered, press t he flash key and pr ess “ 3” t o creat e a
t hree- way conversat ion.
Hang up t he phone t o drop t he connect ion.
I f you want t o separat e t he act ivat ed t hree- way conference int o t w o individual
connect ions ( one is on- line, t he ot her is on hold) , press t he flash key and press
“ 2”.
15.10.2.3 USA Type Supplementary Services
This sect ion describes how t o use supplem ent ary phone services wit h t he USA
Ty pe Ca ll Se r vice M ode . Com m ands for supplem ent ary services are list ed in t he
t able below.
Aft er pressing t he flash key, if you do not issue t he sub- com m and before t he
default sub- com m and t im eout ( 2 seconds) expires or issue an invalid subcom m and, t he current operat ion will be abor t ed.
Table 84 USA Flash Key Commands
SUBCOMMAND COMMAND
Flash
DESCRIPTION
Put a current call on hold t o place a second call. Aft er t he
second call is successful, press t he flash key again t o
have a t hree- way conference call.
Put a current call on hold t o answer an incom ing call.
Flash
* 98#
Transfer t he call t o anot her phone.
USA Call Hold
Call hold allow s you t o put a call ( A) on hold by pressing t he flash key.
I f you have anot her call, press t he flash key t o sw it ch back and fort h bet ween
caller A and B by put t ing eit her one on hold.
I f you hang up t he phone but a caller is st ill on hold, t here will be a rem ind ring.
USA Call Waiting
This allow s you t o place a call on hold while you answer anot her incom ing call on
t he sam e t elephone ( direct ory) num ber.
234
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Voice
I f t here is a second call t o your t elephone num ber, you will hear a call wait ing
t one.
Press t he flash key t o put t he first call on hold and answer t he second call.
USA Call Transfer
Do t he following t o t ransfer an incom ing call ( t hat you have answ ered) t o anot her
phone.
Press t he flash key t o put t he caller on hold.
When you hear t he dial t one, dial “ * 98# ” followed by t he num ber t o which you
want t o t ransfer t he call.
Aft er you hear t he ring signal or t he second part y answers it , hang up t he phone.
USA Three-Way Conference
Use t he following st eps t o m ake t hree- way conference calls.
When you are on t he phone t alking t o som eone ( part y A) , press t he flash key t o
put t he caller on hold and get a dial t one.
Dial a phone num ber direct ly t o m ake anot her call ( t o part y B) .
When part y B answers t he second call, press t he flash key t o cr eat e a t hr ee- way
conversat ion.
Hang up t he phone t o drop t he connect ion.
I f you want t o separat e t he act ivat ed t hree- way conference int o t w o individual
connect ions ( wit h part y A on- line and part y B on hold) , press t he flash key.
I f you want t o go back t o t he t hree- way conversat ion, press t he flash key again.
I f you want t o separat e t he act ivat ed t hree- way conference int o t w o individual
connect ions again, press t he flash key. This t im e t he part y B is on- line and part y A
is on hold.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
235
Chapter 15 Voice
15.10.2.4 Phone Functions Summary
The following t able shows t he key com binat ions you can ent er on your phone’s
keypad t o use cert ain feat ures.
Table 85 Phone Functions Summary
236
ACTION FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
* 98#
Call t ransfer
Transfer a call t o anot her phone. See Sect ion
15.10.2.2 on page 232 ( Europe t ype) and Sect ion
15.10.2.3 on page 234 ( USA t ype) .
* 66#
Call ret urn
Place a call t o t he last person who called you.
* 95#
Enable Do Not Dist urb
# 95#
Disable Do Not Dist urb
Use t hese t o set your phone not t o ring when
som eone calls you, or t o t urn t his funct ion off.
* 41#
Enable Call Wait ing
# 41#
Disable Call Wait ing
****
I VR
Use t hese t o set up I nt eract ive Voice Response
( I VR) . I VR allows you t o record cust om caller ringing
t ones ( t he sound a caller hears before you pick up
t he phone) and on hold t ones ( t he sound som eone
hears when you put t heir call on hold) .
####
I nt ernal Call
Call t he phone( s) connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er.
* 82
One Shot Caller Display
Call
Act ivat e or deact ivat e caller I D for t he next call only.
* 67
One Shot Caller Hidden
Call
Use t hese t o allow you t o put a call on hold when
you are answering anot her, or t o t urn t his funct ion
off.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
16
Diagnostic
16.1 Overview
The D ia gnost ic screens display inform at ion t o help you ident ify problem s wit h t he VDSL Rout er.
The rout e bet ween a CO VDSL swit ch and one of it s CPE m ay go t hrough swit ches owned by
independent organizat ions. A connect ivit y fault point generally t akes t im e t o discover and im pact s
subscriber ’s net work access. I n order t o elim inat e t he m anagem ent and m aint enance effort s, I EEE
802.1ag is a Connect ivit y Fault Managem ent ( CFM) specificat ion which allows net work
adm inist rat ors t o ident ify and m anage connect ion fault s. Through discovery and verificat ion of t he
pat h, CFM can det ect , analyze and isolat e connect ivit y fault s in bridged LANs.
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The D ia gnost ics screen let s you t est t he VDSL Rout er’s connect ions ( Sect ion 16.3 on page 238) .
• The Fa u lt M a n a ge m e nt screen let s you perform CFM act ions ( Sect ion 16.4 on page 238) .
16.2 What You Need to Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t hrough t his chapt er.
How CFM Works
A Maint enance Associat ion ( MA) defines a VLAN and associat ed Maint enance End Point ( MEP) port s
on t he device under a Maint enance Dom ain ( MD) level. An MEP port has t he abilit y t o send
Connect ivit y Check Messages ( CCMs) and get ot her MEP port s inform at ion from neighbor devices’
CCMs wit hin an MA.
CFM provides t wo t est s t o discover connect ivit y fault s.
• Loopback t est - checks if t he MEP port receives it s Loop Back Response ( LBR) from it s t arget
aft er it sends t he Loop Back Message ( LBM) . I f no response is received, t here m ight be a
connect ivit y fault bet ween t hem .
• Link t race t est - provides addit ional connect ivit y fault analysis t o get m ore inform at ion on where
t he fault is. I f an MEP port does not respond t o t he source MEP, t his m ay indicat e a fault .
Adm inist rat ors can t ake furt her act ion t o check and resum e services from t he fault according t o
t he line connect ivit y st at us report .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
237
Chapter 16 Diagnostic
16.3 Diagnostics
Click D ia gnost ics t o open t he screen shown next . Use t his screen t o t est t he VDSL Rout er’s
connect ions.
Figure 100 Diagnost ics
• Click N e x t Con n e ct ion t o t est t he next WAN connect ion.
• Click Te st t o perform t he t est again.
• Click Te st W it h OAM F4 wit h t o perform an OAM ( Operat ion, Adm inist rat ion and Maint enance)
F4 loopback t est on an ATM PVC.
Not e: The DSLAM t o which t he VDSL Rout er is connect ed m ust also support OAM F4 t o
use t he OAM F4 loopback t est .
16.4 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
Click D ia gnost ics > Fa u lt M a na ge m e nt t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o perform
CFM act ions.
238
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Diagnostic
Figure 101 802.1ag Connect ivit y Fault Managem ent
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 86 802.1ag Connect ivit y Fault Managem ent
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
802.1ag Connect ivit y Fault Managem ent
Maint enance
Dom ain ( MD)
Level
Select a level ( 0- 7) under which you want t o creat e an MA.
Dest inat ion
MAC Address
Ent er t he t arget device’s MAC address t o which t he VDSL Rout er perform s a CFM loopback
t est .
802.1Q VLAN
ID
Type a VLAN I D ( 0- 4095) for t his MA.
VDSL Traffic
Type
This shows whet her t he VDSL t raffic is act ivat ed.
Loopback
Message ( LBM)
This shows how m any Loop Back Messages ( LBMs) are sent and if t here is any inorder or
out order Loop Back Response ( LBR) received from a rem ot e MEP.
Linkt race
Message ( LTM)
This shows t he dest inat ion MAC address in t he Link Trace Response ( LTR) .
Set MD Level
Click t his but t on t o configure t he MD ( Maint enance Dom ain) level.
Send Loopback
Click t his but t on t o have t he select ed MEP send t he LBM ( Loop Back Message) t o a specified
rem ot e end point .
Send Linkt race
Click t his but t on t o have t he select ed MEP send t he LTMs ( Link Trace Messages) t o a
specified rem ot e end point .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
239
Chapter 16 Diagnostic
240
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
17
Settings
This chapt er describes how t o m anage your VDSL Rout er’s configurat ion.
17.1 Backup Configuration Using the Web Configurator
Click M a na ge m e nt > Se t t in gs > Ba ck u p t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o back up
( save) t he VDSL Rout er’s current configurat ion t o a file on your com put er. Once your VDSL Rout er is
configured and funct ioning properly, it is highly recom m ended t hat you back up your configurat ion
file before m aking configurat ion changes. The backup configurat ion file will be useful in case you
need t o ret urn t o your previous set t ings.
Figure 102 Set t ings: Backup
Click Ba ck up Se t t ings t o save t he VDSL Rout er’s current configurat ion t o your com put er.
17.2 Restore Configuration Using the Web Configurator
Click M a na ge m e nt > Se t t in gs > Upda t e t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o upload
a new or previously saved configurat ion file from your com put er t o your VDSL Rout er.
Figure 103 Set t ings: Updat e
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
241
Chapter 17 Settings
Table 87 Set t ings: Updat e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Set t ings File
Nam e
Type in t he locat ion of t he file you want t o upload in t his field or click Br ow se ... t o
find it .
Browse...
Click Br ow se ... t o find t he file you want t o upload. Rem em ber t hat you m ust
decom press com pressed ( .ZI P) files before you can upload t hem .
Updat e
Set t ings
Click t his t o begin t he upload process.
Do not turn off the VDSL Router while configuration file upload is in
progress
You m ust t hen wait before logging int o t he VDSL Rout er again. The VDSL Rout er aut om at ically
rest art s causing a t em porary net work disconnect . I n som e operat ing syst em s, you m ay see t he
following icon on your deskt op.
Figure 104 Tem porarily Disconnect ed
You m ay need t o change t he I P address of your com put er t o be in t he sam e subnet as t hat of t he
VDSL Rout er’s I P address ( 192.168.1.1) . See t he appendix for det ails on how t o set up your
com put er ’s I P address.
17.3 Restoring Factory Defaults
Click M a na ge m e nt > Se t t ings > Re st or e D e fa u lt t o open t he following screen.
Figure 105 Managem ent > Set t ings > Rest ore Default
Click Re st or e D e fa ult Se t t ings t o clear all user- ent ered configurat ion inform at ion and ret urn t he
VDSL Rout er t o it s fact ory default s.
You can also press t he RESET but t on on t he rear panel t o reset t he fact ory default s of your VDSL
Rout er.
242
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 17 Settings
You m ay need t o change t he I P address of your com put er t o be in t he sam e subnet as t hat of t he
default VDSL Rout er I P address ( 192.168.1.1) . See t he appendix for det ails on how t o set up your
com put er ’s I P address.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
243
Chapter 17 Settings
244
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
18
Log
18.1 Overview
The web configurat or allows you t o choose which cat egories of event s and/ or alert s t o have t he
VDSL Rout er log and t hen display t he logs or have t he VDSL Rout er send t hem t o an adm inist rat or
( as e- m ail) or t o a syslog server.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use t he Syst e m Log screen t o see t he syst em logs ( Sect ion 18.2 on page 246) .
• Use t he Syst e m Log Con figu r a t ion screen t o see t he securit y- relat ed logs for t he cat egories
t hat you select ( Sect ion 18.3 on page 246) .
18.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following t erm s and concept s m ay help as you read t his chapt er.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a t ype of log t hat warrant s m ore serious at t ent ion. They include syst em errors, at t acks
( access cont rol) and at t em pt ed access t o blocked web sit es. Som e cat egories such as Syst e m
Er r or s consist of bot h logs and alert s. You m ay different iat e t hem by t heir color in t he Vie w Log
screen. Alert s display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog prot ocol allows devices t o send event not ificat ion m essages across an I P net work t o
syslog servers t hat collect t he event m essages. A syslog- enabled device can generat e a syslog
m essage and send it t o a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines t he packet form at , cont ent and syst em log relat ed
inform at ion of syslog m essages. Each syslog m essage has a facilit y and severit y level. The syslog
facilit y ident ifies a file in t he syslog server. Refer t o t he docum ent at ion of your syslog program for
det ails. The following t able describes t he syslog severit y levels.
Table 88 Syslog Severit y Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Em ergency: The syst em is unusable.
Alert : Act ion m ust be t aken im m ediat ely.
Crit ical: The syst em condit ion is crit ical.
Error: There is an error condit ion on t he syst em .
Warning: There is a warning condit ion on t he syst em .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
245
Chapter 18 Log
Table 88 Syslog Severit y Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Not ice: There is a norm al but significant condit ion on t he syst em .
I nform at ional: The syslog cont ains an inform at ional m essage.
Debug: The m essage is int ended for debug- level purposes.
18.2 The System Log Screen
Use t he Syst e m Log screen t o see t he syst em logs. Click M a na ge m e n t > Syst e m Log > Vie w
Syst e m Log t o open t he Syst e m Log screen.
Figure 106 Syst em Log
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 89 Syst em Log
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dat e/ Tim e
This field displays when t he log was recorded.
Facilit y
The log facilit y allows you t o send logs t o different files in t he syslog server. Refer t o t he
docum ent at ion of your syslog program for m ore det ails.
Severit y
This field displays t he severit y level of t he logs t hat t he device is t o send t o t his syslog
server.
Messages
This field st at es t he reason for t he log.
Refresh
Click t his t o renew t he log screen.
Close
Click t his t o close t he log screen.
18.3 The System Log Configuration Screen
To change your VDSL Rout er’s log set t ings, click M a n a ge m e n t > Syst e m Log > Con figu r e
Syst e m Log. The screen appears as shown.
246
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Log
Figure 107 Syst em Log Configurat ion
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 90 Syst em Log Configurat ion
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Log
Select En a ble t o have t he VDSL Rout er log event s.
Log Level
Select t he severit y level of event s t o log.
Display Level
Select t he severit y level of event s t o display in t he log.
Mode
Select t he syslog dest inat ion from t he drop- down list box.
Select Re m ot e , t he log( s) t o send logs only t o a rem ot e syslog server. Select Loca l t o save
t he logs in a local file. To send t he log( s) t o a rem ot e syslog server and save it in a local file,
select Bot h .
Server I P
Address
Ent er t he I P address of t he syslog server t hat will log t he select ed cat egories of logs.
Server UDP
Port
Ent er t he port num ber used by t he syslog server.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
247
Chapter 18 Log
248
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
19
TR-069 Client
19.1 Overview
This chapt er explains how t o configure t he VDSL Rout er’s TR- 069 aut o- configurat ion set t ings.
19.2 The TR-069 Client Screen
TR- 069 defines how Cust om er Prem ise Equipm ent ( CPE) , for exam ple your VDSL Rout er, can be
m anaged over t he WAN by an Aut o Configurat ion Server ( ACS) . TR- 069 is based on sending
Rem ot e Procedure Calls ( RPCs) bet ween an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Ext ensible
Markup Language ( XML) form at over HTTP or HTTPS.
An adm inist rat or can use an ACS t o rem ot ely set up t he VDSL Rout er, m odify set t ings, perform
firm ware upgrades as well as m onit or and diagnose t he VDSL Rout er. You have t o enable t he device
t o be m anaged by t he ACS and specify t he ACS I P address or dom ain nam e and usernam e and
password.
Click M a na ge m e nt > TR- 0 6 9 Clie nt t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o configure
your VDSL Rout er t o be m anaged by an ACS.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
249
Chapter 19 TR-069 Client
Figure 108 TR- 069 Client
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 91 TR- 069 Client
250
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
I nform
Select En a ble for t he VDSL Rout er t o send periodic inform via TR- 069 on t he WAN.
Ot herwise, select D isa ble .
I nform I nt erval
Ent er t he t im e int erval ( in seconds) at which t he VDSL Rout er sends inform at ion t o t he aut oconfigurat ion server.
ACS URL
Ent er t he URL or I P address of t he aut o- configurat ion server.
ACS User Nam e
Ent er t he TR- 069 user nam e for aut hent icat ion wit h t he aut o- configurat ion server.
ACS Password
Ent er t he TR- 069 password for aut hent icat ion wit h t he aut o- configurat ion server.
WAN I nt erface
used by TR- 069
client
Select a WAN int erface t hrough which t he TR- 069 t raffic passes.
Display SOAP
m essages on
serial console
Select En a ble t o show t he SOAP m essages on t he console.
Connect ion
Request
Aut hent icat ion
Select t his opt ion t o enable aut hent icat ion when t here is a connect ion request from t he ACS.
Connect ion
Request User
Nam e
Ent er t he connect ion request user nam e.
Connect ion
Request
Password
Ent er t he connect ion request password.
I f you select An y_ W AN , you should also select t he pre- configured WAN connect ion( s) .
When t he ACS m akes a connect ion request t o t he VDSL Rout er, t his user nam e is used t o
aut hent icat e t he ACS.
When t he ACS m akes a connect ion request t o t he VDSL Rout er, t his password is used t o
aut hent icat e t he ACS.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 19 TR-069 Client
Table 91 TR- 069 Client ( cont inued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Connect ion
Request URL
This shows t he connect ion request URL.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
The ACS can use t his URL t o m ake a connect ion request t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
251
Chapter 19 TR-069 Client
252
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
20
Internet Time
20.1 The Internet Time Screen
Click M a n a ge m e nt > I n t e r ne t Tim e t o configure t he VDSL Rout er t o get t he t im e from t im e
servers on t he I nt ernet .
Figure 109 I nt ernet Tim e
The following t able describes t he fields in t his screen.
Table 92 I nt ernet Tim e
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Aut om at ically
synchronize wit h
I nt ernet t im e
servers
Select t his t o have t he VDSL Rout er get t he t im e from t he specified I nt ernet t im e servers.
First ~ Fift h NTP
t im e server
Select an NTP t im e server from t he drop- down list box.
Ot herwise, select Ot h e r and ent er t he I P address or URL ( up t o 29 ext ended ASCI I
charact ers in lengt h) of your t im e server.
Select N on e if you don’t want t o configure t he t im e server.
Check wit h your I SP/ net work adm inist rat or if you are unsure of t his inform at ion.
Tim e zone offset
Choose t he t im e zone of your locat ion. This will set t he t im e difference bet ween your t im e
zone and Greenwich Mean Tim e ( GMT) .
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
253
Chapter 20 Internet Time
254
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
21
Access Control
21.1 Overview
Change t he login password in t he Acce ss Cont r ol screen.
21.2 The Access Control Screen
Click M a n a ge m e nt > Acce ss Con t r ol t o open t he following screen.
Figure 110 Access Cont rol
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 93 Access Cont rol
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Nam e
This field displays t he nam e of t he account t hat you used t o log in t he syst em .
Old Password
Type t he default password or t he exist ing password you use t o access t he syst em in t his
field.
New Password
Type your new syst em password ( up t o 30 charact ers) . Not e t hat as you t ype a password,
t he screen displays a ( * ) for each charact er you t ype. Aft er you change t he password, use
t he new password t o access t he VDSL Rout er.
Ret ype t o
confirm
Type t he new password again for confirm at ion.
Apply/ Save
Click t his but t on t o save your changes.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
255
Chapter 21 Access Control
256
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
22
Software Upgrade
22.1 Overview
This chapt er explains how t o upload new soft ware t o your VDSL Rout er. You can download new
soft ware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP sit e ( or www.zyxel.com ) t o use t o upgrade your
device’s perform ance.
Only use software for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your VDSL Router.
22.2 The Update Software Screen
Click M a na ge m e nt > Upda t e Soft w a r e t o open t he following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP ( Hypert ext Transfer Prot ocol) and m ay t ake up t o t wo m inut es. Aft er a successful upload, t he
syst em will reboot .
Do NOT turn off the VDSL Router while software upload is in progress!
Figure 111 Updat e Soft ware
The following t able describes t he labels in t his screen.
Table 94 Updat e Soft ware
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Soft ware File
Nam e
Type in t he locat ion of t he file you want t o upload in t his field or click Br ow se ... t o find it .
Browse...
Click t his t o find t he .bin file you want t o upload. Rem em ber t hat you m ust decom press
com pressed ( .zip) files before you can upload t hem .
Updat e
Soft ware
Click t his t o begin t he upload process. This process m ay t ake up t o t wo m inut es.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
257
Chapter 22 Software Upgrade
Aft er you see t he soft ware updat ing screen, wait t wo m inut es before logging int o t he VDSL Rout er
again.
The VDSL Rout er aut om at ically rest art s in t his t im e causing a t em porary net work disconnect . I n
som e operat ing syst em s, you m ay see t he following icon on your deskt op.
Figure 112 Net work Tem porarily Disconnect ed
Aft er t wo m inut es, log in again and check your new soft ware version in t he D e vice I nfo screen.
258
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
23
Reboot
23.1 Restart Using the Web Configurator
Click M a n a ge m e nt > Re boot t o open t he following screen. Use t his screen t o rest art t he .
Figure 113 Reboot
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
259
Chapter 23 Reboot
260
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
C HAPTER
24
Troubleshooting
This chapt er offers som e suggest ions t o solve problem s you m ight encount er. The pot ent ial
problem s are divided int o t he following cat egories.
• Power, Hardware Connect ions, and LEDs
• VDSL Rout er Access and Login
• I nt ernet Access
• Wireless I nt ernet Access
• USB Device Connect ion
• UPnP
24.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The VDSL Rout er does not t urn on. None of t he LEDs t urn on.
Make sure t he VDSL Rout er is t urned on.
Make sure you are using t he power adapt or or cord included wit h t he VDSL Rout er.
Make sure t he power adapt or or cord is connect ed t o t he VDSL Rout er and plugged in t o an
appropriat e power source. Make sure t he power source is t urned on.
Turn t he VDSL Rout er off and on.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he vendor.
One of t he LEDs does not behave as expect ed.
Make sure you underst and t he norm al behavior of t he LED. See Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.
Check t he hardware connect ions.
I nspect your cables for dam age. Cont act t he vendor t o replace any dam aged cables.
Turn t he VDSL Rout er off and on.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
261
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he vendor.
24.2 VDSL Router Access and Login
I forgot t he I P address for t he VDSL Rout er.
See t he cover page of t his guide for t he default LAN I P address.
I f you changed t he I P address and have forgot t en it , you m ight get t he I P address of t he VDSL
Rout er by looking up t he I P address of t he default gat eway for your com put er. To do t his in m ost
Windows com put ers, click St a r t > Run , ent er cm d, and t hen ent er ipconfig. The I P address of t he
D e fa ult Ga t e w a y m ight be t he I P address of t he VDSL Rout er ( it depends on t he net work) , so
ent er t his I P address in your I nt ernet browser.
I f t his does not work, you have t o reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s. See Sect ion 1.7 on page
16.
I forgot t he passwor d.
See t he back st icker for t he default adm in password.
I f t his does not work, you have t o reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s. See Sect ion 1.7 on page
16.
I cannot see or access t he Login screen in t he web configurat or.
Make sure you are using t he correct I P address.
• See t he cover page of t his guide for t he default I P address.
• I f you changed t he I P address ( Sect ion 5.2 on page 106) , use t he new I P address.
• I f you changed t he I P address and have forgot t en it , see t he t roubleshoot ing suggest ions for I
forgot t he I P address for t he VDSL Rout er.
262
Check t he hardware connect ions, and m ake sure t he LEDs are behaving as expect ed. See Sect ion
1.5 on page 14.
Make sure your I nt ernet browser does not block pop- up windows and has JavaScript s and Java
enabled.
I f it is possible t o log in from anot her int erface, check t he service cont rol set t ings for HTTP and
HTTPS ( M a int e n a n ce > Re m ot e M GM T) .
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
Reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s, and t ry t o access t he VDSL Rout er wit h t he default I P
address. See Sect ion 1.7 on page 16.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act t he net work adm inist rat or or vendor, or t ry one of t he advanced
suggest ions.
Adva n ce d Sugge st ions
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier m anagem ent sessions using t he sam e user account
even if t hey were t hrough a different int erface or using a different browser.
• Try t o access t he VDSL Rout er using anot her service, such as Telnet . I f you can access t he VDSL
Rout er, check t he rem ot e m anagem ent set t ings and firewall rules t o find out why t he VDSL
Rout er does not respond t o HTTP.
I can see t he Login screen, but I cannot log in t o t he VDSL Rout er.
Make sure you have ent ered t he password correct ly. The field is case- sensit ive, so m ake sure [ Caps
Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in t o t he web configurat or while som eone is using Telnet t o access t he VDSL Rout er.
Log out of t he VDSL Rout er in t he ot her session, or ask t he person who is logged in t o log out .
Turn t he VDSL Rout er off and on.
I f t his does not work, you have t o reset t he device t o it s fact ory default s. See Sect ion 24.1 on page
261.
I cannot Telnet t o t he VDSL Rout er.
See t he t roubleshoot ing suggest ions for I cannot see or access t he Login screen in t he web
configurat or. I gnore t he suggest ions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP t o upload / download t he configurat ion file. / I cannot use FTP t o upload
new soft ware.
See t he t roubleshoot ing suggest ions for I cannot see or access t he Login screen in t he web
configurat or. I gnore t he suggest ions about your browser.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
263
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
24.3 Internet Access
I cannot access t he I nt er net .
Check t he hardware connect ions, and m ake sure t he LEDs are behaving as expect ed. See t he
Quick St a r t Guide and Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.
Make sure you ent ered your I SP account inform at ion correct ly in t he N e t w or k Se t t in g >
Br oa dba n d screen. These fields are case- sensit ive, so m ake sure [ Caps Lock] is not on.
I f you are t rying t o access t he I nt ernet wirelessly, m ake sure t hat you enabled t he wireless LAN in
t he VDSL Rout er and your wireless client and t hat t he wireless set t ings in t he wireless client are t he
sam e as t he set t ings in t he VDSL Rout er.
Disconnect all t he cables from your device and reconnect t hem .
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act your I SP.
I cannot access t he I nt er net t hrough a DSL connect ion.
Make sure you have t he D SL W AN port connect ed t o a t elephone j ack ( or t he DSL or m odem j ack
on a split t er if you have one) .
Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN int erface (N e t w or k Se t t in g > Br oa dba n d screen)
wit h t he I nt ernet account inform at ion provided by your I SP and t hat it is enabled.
Check t hat t he LAN int erface you are connect ed t o is in t he sam e int erface group as t he DSL
connect ion ( N e t w or k Se t t ing > I nt e r fa ce Gr oup) .
I f you set up a WAN connect ion using bridging service, m ake sure you t urn off t he DHCP feat ure in
t he LAN screen t o have t he client s get WAN I P addresses direct ly from your I SP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect t o t he I nt ernet using a second DSL connect ion.
ADSL and VDSL connect ions cannot work at t he sam e t im e. You can only use one t ype of DSL
connect ion, eit her ADSL or VDSL connect ion at one t im e.
I cannot access t he I nt er net anym ore. I had access t o t he I nt ernet ( wit h t he VDSL Rout er) ,
but m y I nt ernet connect ion is not available anym ore.
264
Your session wit h t he VDSL Rout er m ay have expired. Try logging int o t he VDSL Rout er again.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
Check t he hardware connect ions, and m ake sure t he LEDs are behaving as expect ed. See t he
Quick St a r t Guide and Sect ion 1.5 on page 14.
Turn t he VDSL Rout er off and on.
I f t he problem cont inues, cont act your I SP.
24.4 Wireless Internet Access
What fact ors m ay cause int erm it t ent or unst abled wireless connect ion? How can I solve t his
problem ?
The following fact ors m ay cause int erference:
• Obst acles: walls, ceilings, furnit ure, and so on.
• Building Mat erials: m et al doors, alum inum st uds.
• Elect rical devices: m icrowaves, m onit ors, elect ric m ot ors, cordless phones, and ot her wireless
devices.
To opt im ize t he speed and qualit y of your wireless connect ion, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer t o t he AP if t he signal st rengt h is low.
• Reduce wireless int erference t hat m ay be caused by ot her wireless net works or surrounding
wireless elect ronics such as cordless phones.
• Place t he AP where t here are m inim um obst acles ( such as walls and ceilings) bet ween t he AP and
t he wireless client .
• Reduce t he num ber of wireless client s connect ing t o t he sam e AP sim ult aneously, or add
addit ional APs if necessary.
• Try closing som e program s t hat use t he I nt ernet , especially peer- t o- peer applicat ions. I f t he
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of inform at ion, it m ay have t oo m any program s open
t hat use t he I nt ernet .
What is a Server Set I D ( SSI D) ?
An SSI D is a nam e t hat uniquely ident ifies a wireless net work. The AP and all t he client s wit hin a
wireless net work m ust use t he sam e SSI D.
What wireless securit y m odes does m y VDSL Rout er support ?
Wireless securit y is vit al t o your net work. I t prot ect s com m unicat ions bet ween wireless st at ions,
access point s and t he wired net work. Your VDSL Rout er provides t he following wireless securit y
m odes:
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
265
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
• W PA: Wi- Fi Prot ect ed Access ( WPA) is a subset of t he I EEE 802.11i st andard. I t requires t he use
of a RADI US server and is m ost ly used in business net works.
• W PA- PSK: This has t he device use eit her WPA- PSK or WPA2- PSK depending on which securit y
m ode t he wireless client uses.
• W PA2 : WPA2 ( I EEE 802.11i) is a wireless securit y st andard t hat defines st ronger encrypt ion,
aut hent icat ion and key m anagem ent t han WPA. I t requires t he use of a RADI US server and is
m ost ly used in business net works.
• W PA2 - PSK: This uses a pre- shared key wit h t he WPA2 st andard.
• M ix e d W PA2 / W PA: This allows users t o connect using eit her WPA2 or WPA.
• M ix e d W PA2 / W PA - PSK: This allows users t o connect using eit her WPA2- PSK or WPA- PSK.
• W EP: Wired Equivalent Privacy ( WEP) encrypt ion scram bles t he dat a t ransm it t ed bet ween t he
wireless st at ions and t he access point s t o keep net work com m unicat ions privat e.
24.5 USB Device Connection
The VDSL Rout er fails t o det ect m y USB device.
Disconnect t he USB device.
Reboot t he VDSL Rout er.
I f you are connect ing a USB hard drive t hat com es wit h an ext ernal power supply, m ake sure it is
connect ed t o an appropriat e power source t hat is on.
Re- connect your USB device t o t he VDSL Rout er.
24.6 UPnP
When using UPnP and t he VDSL Rout er reboot s, m y com put er cannot det ect UPnP and
refresh M y N e t w or k Pla ce s > Loca l N e t w or k .
Disconnect t he Et hernet cable from t he VDSL Rout er’s LAN port or from your com put er.
Re- connect t he Et hernet cable.
The Loca l Ar e a Con n e ct ion icon for UPnP disappears in t he screen.
Rest art your com put er.
266
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
I cannot open special applicat ions such as whit e board, file t ransfer and video when I use t he
MSN m essenger.
Wait m ore t han t hree m inut es.
Rest art t he applicat ions.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
267
Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
268
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2012 by ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion.
The cont ent s of t his publicat ion m ay not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, t ranscribed,
st ored in a ret rieval syst em , t ranslat ed int o any language, or t ransm it t ed in any form or by any
m eans, elect ronic, m echanical, m agnet ic, opt ical, chem ical, phot ocopying, m anual, or ot herwise,
wit hout t he prior writ t en perm ission of ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion.
Published by ZyXEL Com m unicat ions Corporat ion. All right s reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assum e any liabilit y arising out of t he applicat ion or use of any product s, or
soft ware described herein. Neit her does it convey any license under it s pat ent right s nor t he pat ent
right s of ot hers. ZyXEL furt her reserves t he right t o m ake changes in any product s described herein
wit hout not ice. This publicat ion is subj ect t o change wit hout not ice.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device com plies wit h Part 15 of FCC rules. Operat ion is subj ect t o t he following t wo condit ions:
• This device m ay not cause harm ful int erference.
• This device m ust accept any int erference received, including int erference t hat m ay cause
undesired operat ions.
This device has been t est ed and found t o com ply wit h t he lim it s for a Class B digit al device pursuant
t o Part 15 of t he FCC Rules. These lim it s are designed t o provide reasonable prot ect ion against
harm ful int erference in a resident ial inst allat ion. This device generat es, uses, and can radiat e radio
frequency energy, and if not inst alled and used in accordance wit h t he inst ruct ions, m ay cause
harm ful int erference t o radio com m unicat ions. However, t here is no guarant ee t hat int erference will
not occur in a part icular inst allat ion.
I f t his device does cause harm ful int erference t o radio/ t elevision recept ion, which can be
det erm ined by t urning t he device off and on, t he user is encouraged t o t ry t o correct t he
int erference by one or m ore of t he following m easures:
Reorient or relocat e t he receiving ant enna.
I ncrease t he separat ion bet ween t he equipm ent and t he receiver.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
269
Appendix A Legal Information
Connect t he equipm ent int o an out let on a circuit different from t hat t o which t he receiver is
connect ed.
Consult t he dealer or an experienced radio/ TV t echnician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This t ransm it t er m ust not be co- locat ed or operat ing in conj unct ion wit h any ot her ant enna or
t ransm it t er.
• I EEE 802.11b or 802.11g operat ion of t his product in t he U.S.A. is soft ware- lim it ed t o channels 1
t hrough 11.
• To com ply wit h FCC RF exposure com pliance requirem ent s, a separat ion dist ance of at least 20
cm m ust be m aint ained bet ween t he ant enna of t his device and all persons.
注意 !
依據
低
率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低 率射頻電機，非經許可，公司
者均不得擅自變更頻率
大 率或變更原設計之特性及 能
商號或使用
第十四條 低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安 及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信 低 率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用
使用
Notices
Changes or m odificat ions not expressly approved by t he part y responsible for com pliance could
void t he user's aut horit y t o operat e t he equipm ent .
This device has been designed for t he WLAN 2.4 GHz net work t hroughout t he EC region and
Swit zerland, wit h rest rict ions in France.
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et / ou 5 GHz conform ém ent à la
législat ion Européenne. En France m ét ropolit aine, suivant les décisions n° 03- 908 et 03- 909 de
l’ARCEP, la puissance d’ém ission ne devra pas dépasser 10 m W ( 10 dB) dans le cadre d’une
inst allat ion WiFi en ext érieur pour les fréquences com prises ent re 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
This Class B digit al apparat us com plies wit h Canadian I CES- 003.
Cet appareil num érique de la classe B est conform e à la norm e NMB- 003 du Canada.
270
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Appendix A Legal Information
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrant s t o t he original end user ( purchaser) t hat t his product is free from any defect s in
m at erial or workm anship for a specific period ( t he Warrant y Period) from t he dat e of purchase. The
Warrant y Period varies by region. Check wit h your vendor and/ or t he aut horized ZyXEL local
dist ribut or for det ails about t he Warrant y Period of t his product . During t he warrant y period, and
upon proof of purchase, should t he product have indicat ions of failure due t o fault y workm anship
and/ or m at erials, ZyXEL will, at it s discret ion, repair or replace t he defect ive product s or
com ponent s wit hout charge for eit her part s or labor, and t o what ever ext ent it shall deem
necessary t o rest ore t he product or com ponent s t o proper operat ing condit ion. Any replacem ent
will consist of a new or re- m anufact ured funct ionally equivalent product of equal or higher value,
and will be solely at t he discret ion of ZyXEL. This warrant y shall not apply if t he product has been
m odified, m isused, t am pered wit h, dam aged by an act of God, or subj ect ed t o abnorm al working
condit ions.
Note
Repair or replacem ent , as provided under t his warrant y, is t he exclusive rem edy of t he purchaser.
This warrant y is in lieu of all ot her warrant ies, express or im plied, including any im plied warrant y of
m erchant abilit y or fit ness for a part icular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for
indirect or consequent ial dam ages of any kind t o t he purchaser.
To obt ain t he services of t his warrant y, cont act your vendor. You m ay also refer t o t he warrant y
policy for t he region in which you bought t he device at ht t p: / / www.zyxel.com / web/
support _warrant y_info.php.
Registration
Regist er your product online t o receive e- m ail not ices of firm ware upgrades and inform at ion at
www.zyxel.com for global product s, or at www.us.zyxel.com for Nort h Am erican product s.
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do NOT use t his product near wat er, for exam ple, in a wet basem ent or near a swim m ing pool.
Do NOT expose your device t o dam pness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT st ore t hings on t he device.
Avoid using t his product ( ot her t han a cordless t ype) during an elect rical st orm . There m ay be a rem ot e risk of elect ric shock from
light ning.
Do NOT inst all, use, or ser vice t his device during a t hunderst orm . There is a r em ot e risk of elect ric shock from light ning.
Connect ONLY suit able accessories t o t he device.
Do NOT open t he device or unit . Opening or rem oving covers can expose you t o dangerous high volt age point s or ot her risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassem ble t his device. Please cont act your vendor for furt her inform at ion.
Make sure t o connect t he cables t o t he correct port s.
Place connect ing cables carefully so t hat no one will st ep on t hem or st um ble over t hem .
Always disconnect all t elephone lines from t he wall out let before servicing or disassem bling t his equipm ent .
Use ONLY an appropriat e power adapt or or cord for your device.
Connect t he power adapt or or cord t o t he right supply volt age ( for exam ple, 110V AC in Nort h Am er ica or 230V AC in Europe) .
Do NOT allow anyt hing t o rest on t he power adapt or or cord and do NOT place t he product where anyone can walk on t he power
adapt or or cord.
Do NOT use t he device if t he power adapt or or cor d is dam aged as it m ight cause elect rocut ion.
I f t he power adapt or or cord is dam aged, rem ove it fr om t he device and t he pow er source.
Do NOT at t em pt t o repair t he power adapt or or cord. Cont act your local vendor t o order a new one.
Do not use t he device out side, and m ake sure all t he connect ions are indoors. There m ay be a rem ot e risk of elect ric shock from
light ning.
Do NOT obst ruct t he device vent ilat ion slot s, as insufficient airflow m ay harm your device.
To reduce t he risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG ( Am er ican Wir e Gauge) or lar ger t elecom m unicat ion line cord.
The RJ- 45 j acks are not used for t elephone line connect ion.
Ant enna Warning! This device m eet s ETSI and FCC cert ificat ion requirem ent s when using t he included ant enna( s) . Only use t he
included ant enna( s) .
Your product is m arked w it h t his sym bol, which is know n as t he WEEE m ark. WEEE st ands for Wast e Elect ronics and Elect rical
Equipm ent . I t m eans t hat used elect rical and elect ronic product s should not be m ixed w it h general wast e. Used elect rical and
elect ronic equipm ent should be t reat ed separat ely.
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
271
Appendix A Legal Information
272
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Index
Index
CBR ( Cont inuous Bit Rat e) 80
CCMs 237
ACK m essage 226
ACS 249
act ivat ion
m edia server 167
adding a print er exam ple 48
applicat ions
m edia server 166
act ivat ion 167
iTunes server 166
aut hent icat ion 188, 190
RADI US server 190
Aut o Configurat ion Server, see ACS 249
cert ificat e
fact ory default 170
cert ificat es 169
aut hent icat ion 169
CA
creat ing 170
public key 169
replacing 170
st orage space 170
Cert ificat ion Aut horit y 169
Cert ificat ion Aut horit y. see CA
cert ificat ions 269
not ices 270
CFI 102
backing up configurat ion 241
backup set t ings 241
Basic Service Set , see BSS
blinking LEDs 14
broadcast 103
BSS 191
exam ple 191
BYE request 226
CFM 237
CCMs 237
link t race t est 237
loopback t est 237
MA 237
MD 237
MEP 237
MI P 237
channel, wireless LAN 188
Class of Service 230
Class of Service, see CoS
client- server prot ocol 223
com fort noise generat ion 229
CA 169
call hist ory 219
incom ing calls 220
out going calls 219
call hold 233, 234
call service m ode 232, 234
call t ransfer 233, 235
call wait ing 233, 234
Canonical Form at I ndicat or See CFI
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
configurat ion
backup 241
rest ore 241
st at ic rout e 141
configurat ion backup 241
Connect ivit y Check Messages, see CCMs
copyright 269
CoS 136, 230
CoS t echnologies 128
creat ing cert ificat es 170
CTS t hreshold 185, 188
273
Index
dat a fragm ent t hreshold 185, 188
FCC int erference st at em ent 269
default 242
File Sharing 162
DHCP 106, 112
different iat ed services 231
filt ers
MAC address 183, 189
Different iat ed Services, see DiffServ 136
Finger 119
DiffServ 136
m arking rule 137
firewall
enabling 121
DiffServ ( Different iat ed Services) 230
code point s 230
m arking rule 231
firm ware 257
version 62
digit al I Ds 169
flashing 232
disclaim er 269
fragm ent at ion t hreshold 185, 188
DLNA 166
FTP 116, 119
flash key 232
DNS 106, 112
DNS server address assignm ent 103
docum ent at ion
relat ed 2
Dom ain Nam e 119
G.168 229
Dom ain Nam e Syst em , see DNS
General wireless LAN screen 178
Dom ain Nam e Syst em . See DNS.
DS field 136, 231
DS, dee different iat ed services
DSCP 136, 231
dynam ic DNS 145
wildcard 146
HTTP 119
Dynam ic Host Configurat ion Prot ocol, see DHCP
DYNDNS wildcard 146
I EEE 802.1Q 102
I GMP 103
version 103
ECHO 119
I nt ernet Prot ocol version 6 77
echo cancellat ion 229
I nt ernet Service Provider, see I SP
Encapsulat ion 99
MER 99
PPP over Et hernet 99
I P Address 118
encapsulat ion 76
RFC 1483 100
encrypt ion 190
Europe t ype call service m ode 232
Ext ended Service Set I Dent ificat ion 179
I P address 106, 113
privat e 113
WAN 76
I P Address Assignm ent 102
I P filt er
creat ing or edit ing rules 125
int roduct ion 121
I Pv6 77
274
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Index
addressing 77, 103
prefix 77, 103
prefix delegat ion 78
prefix lengt h 77, 103
I SP 76
MAC filt er 184
Maint enance Associat ion, see MA
Maint enance Dom ain, see MD
Maint enance End Point , see MEP
iTunes server 166
m anaging t he device
good habit s 13
I TU-T 229
Maxim um Burst Size ( MBS) 80, 100
MD 237
m edia server 166
act ivat ion 167
iTunes server 166
key com binat ions 236
MEP 237
keypad 236
MTU ( Mult i-Tenant Unit ) 102
m ult icast 103
m ult im edia 221
LAN 105
and USB print er 166
DHCP 106, 112
DNS 106, 112
I P address 106, 109, 113
MAC address 108
subnet m ask 106, 113
m ult iplexing 100
LLC- based 100
VC- based 100
m ult iprot ocol encapsulat ion 100
link t race 237
NAT 115
default server 118
DMZ host 118
port num ber 116, 119
services 119
virt ual servers 115
Link Trace Message, see LTM
NAT exam ple 119
Link Trace Response, see LTR
Net work Address Translat ion, see NAT
list ening port 212
net work disconnect icon 242
logs 245
Net work Map 61
Loop Back Response, see LBR
NNTP 119
loopback 237
non- proxy calls 217
LBR 237
lim it at ions
wireless LAN 191
WPS 197
LTM 237
LTR 237
OK response 226, 228
ot her docum ent at ion 2
MA 237
MAC address 108, 183
filt er 183, 189
MAC aut hent icat ion 183
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
275
Index
PBC 192
RADI US server 190
Peak Cell Rat e ( PCR) 80, 100
Real t im e Transport Prot ocol, see RTP
peer- t o- peer calls 217
Per- Hop Behavior, see PHB 137
regist rat ion
product 271
PHB 137, 231
relat ed docum ent at ion 2
phone book
speed dial 217
rem ot e m anagem ent
TR- 069 249
phone funct ions 236
Rem ot e Procedure Calls, see RPCs 249
PI N, WPS 193
exam ple 194
reset 16
Point- t o- Point Tunneling Prot ocol 119
rest ore set t ings 241
POP3 119
RFC 1058. See RI P.
port s 14
RFC 1389. See RI P.
PPP over Et hernet , see PPPoE
RFC 1483 100
PPPoE 76, 99
Benefit s 99
RFC 1631 115
PPTP 119
RFC 3164 245
pream ble 186, 188
RI P 143
pream ble m ode 192
Rout ing I nform at ion Prot ocol. See RI P
prefix delegat ion 78
RPCs 249
Print er Server 165
RTP 225
print er sharing
and LAN 166
requirem ent s 165
RTS t hreshold 185, 188
privat e I P address 113
product regist rat ion 271
prot ocol 76
push but t on 17
Push But t on Configurat ion, see PBC
push but t on, WPS 192
rest ore configurat ion 241
RFC 1889 225
safet y warnings 271
save set t ings 241
securit y
wireless LAN 188
Service Set 179
Services 119
QoS 127, 136, 230
m arking 128
set up 127
t agging 128
versus CoS 128
Qualit y of Service, see QoS
276
Session I nit iat ion Prot ocol, see SI P
set t ings
backup 241
rest ore 241
set up
st at ic rout e 141
silence suppression 228
SI P 221
account 221
call progression 226
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
Index
client 223
ident it ies 221
I NVI TE request 226, 227
num ber 222
OK response 228
proxy server 223
redirect server 224
regist er server 225
servers 223
service dom ain 222
URI 221
user agent 223
t hresholds
dat a fragm ent 185, 188
RTS/ CTS 185, 188
t im e 253
ToS 230
TPI D 102
TR- 069 249
ACS set up 249
aut hent icat ion 250
t raffic shaping 100
Type of Service, see ToS
SI P ALG 119
SMTP 119
SNMP 119
SNMP t rap 119
speed dial 217
unicast 103
SSI D 189
Uniform Resource I dent ifier 221
st at ic rout e 139
configurat ion 141
exam ple 139
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firm ware 257
st at us indicat ors 14
UPnP 151
caut ions 151
exam ple 152
inst allat ion 152
NAT t raversal 151
subnet m ask 106, 113
USA t ype call service m ode 234
st at ic VLAN
st at us
firm ware version 62
supplem ent ary services 231
Sust ain Cell Rat e ( SCR) 80
Sust ained Cell Rat e ( SCR) 100
syslog
prot ocol 245
severit y levels 245
VAD 228
VI D
syst em
firm ware 257
version 62
reset 16
t im e 253
Virt ual Circuit ( VC) 100
VLAN I D 102
Virt ual Local Area Net work See VLAN
VLAN 102
I nt roduct ion 102
num ber of possible VI Ds
priorit y fram e
st at ic
VLAN I dent ifier See VI D
Tag Cont rol I nform at ion See TCI
VLAN t ag 102
Tag Prot ocol I dent ifier See TPI D
voice act ivit y det ect ion 228
TCI
voice coding 228
The 76
VoI P 221
peer- t o- peer calls 217
t hree- way conference 233, 235
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide
277
Index
WAN
Wide Area Net work, see WAN 75
WAN int erface 67
warrant y 271
not e 271
WEP 190
wireless LAN 177, 186
aut hent icat ion 188, 190
BSS 191
exam ple 191
channel 188
encrypt ion 190
exam ple 187
fragm ent at ion t hreshold 185, 188
lim it at ions 191
MAC address filt er 183, 189
pream ble 186, 188
RADI US server 190
RTS/ CTS t hreshold 185, 188
securit y 188
SSI D 189
WEP 190
WPA 190
WPA- PSK 190
WPS 192, 194
exam ple 195
lim it at ions 197
PI N 193
push but t on 17, 192
Wireless t ut orial 22
WPA 190
WPA- PSK 190
WPS 192, 194
exam ple 195
lim it at ions 197
PI N 193
exam ple 194
push but t on 17, 192
278
Basic Home Station VDSL2 P8802T User’s Guide

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Author                          : MT01165
Modify Date                     : 2012:08:08 14:53:16+08:00
Create Date                     : 2012:08:07 14:02:32Z
Page Count                      : 278
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP Core 4.1.1
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2012:08:07 16:04:41+08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Book.book
Creator                         : MT01165
Document ID                     : uuid:88db04e1-956b-4180-b473-5eae2cf24a38
Instance ID                     : uuid:cd8d2e12-e198-4aba-89bb-cd39765e12ee
Producer                        : PDF-XChange Viewer [Version: 2.0 (Build 42.2) (Jul 14 2009; 17:13:23)]
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : OneColumn

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

ZyXEL Communications P8802T Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD With USB User Manual Book

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N VDSL2 VoIP IAD With USB Book

User Manual

FCC ID Filing: I88P8802T

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation